Home

Lexmark 16M1742 Printer User Manual

1. Flash memory and firmware card connectors 21 Memory card connector Installing a memory card CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board To install the memory card 1 Access the system board Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the memory card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 3 Open the memory card connector latches A 4 Align the notch on the memory card with the ridge on the connector 5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place 6 Reattach the system board cover 30 Additional printer setup 31 Installing a flash memory or firmware card The system board has two connections
2. 4 Unpack a new cartridge Warning Potential Damage When replacing a toner cartridge do not leave the new cartridge exposed to direct light for an extended period of time Extended light exposure can cause print quality problems 5 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side several times to redistribute the toner S e Maintaining the printer 206 6 Insert the new cartridge into the printer Push the toner cartridge in as far as it will go The cartridge clicks into place when correctly installed 7 Close the front door Replacing the photoconductor You can determine approximately how full the photoconductor is by printing the printer settings configuration sheet This helps you decide when you might need to order replacement supplies To ensure print quality and to avoid damage to the printer the printer stops operating after the photoconductor has reached a maximum of 60 000 pages The printer automatically notifies you before the photoconductor reaches this point Maintaining the printer 207 When 84 Replace photoconductor or 84 Photoconductor low appears order a new photoconductor immediately While the printer may continue to function properly after the photoconductor has reached its official end of life print quality significantly decreases To replace the photoconductor 1 Turn the printer off 2 Open the front door
3. Note The photoconductor cannot be pulled out if Side Door A is closed Maintaining the printer 208 3 Lower Side Door A Place the photoconductor on a flat clean surface 5 Unpack the new photoconductor 209 Maintaining the printer 6 Align and insert the end of the photoconductor A y 7 Remove the tape from the top of the photoconductor a v 210 Maintaining the printer 8 Push the photoconductor as far as it will go The photoconductor clicks into place when correctly installed 9 Close Side Door A Maintaining the printer 211 10 Close the front door Note After you insert the photoconductor and close all the doors the printer performs a motor cycle and clears the Replace Photoconductor warnings The printer returns to the Ready state Moving the printer Before moving the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 55kg 121 Ibs and requires at least four persons or a properly rated mechanical handling system to move it safely Maintaining the printer 212 Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage e Use at least four people or a properly rated mechanical handling system to lift the printer e Turn the printer off using the power switch and t
4. 2 Adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy or use the keypad to enter the number of copies The copy screen appears 4 Change the copy settings as needed 5 Touch Copy It Copying 88 Copying using the scanner glass 1 2 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner On the home screen touch Copy or use the keypad to enter the number of copies The copy screen appears Change the copy settings as needed Touch Copy It If you have more pages to scan then place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Next Page Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Copying photos 1 2 3 4 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner On the home screen touch Copy Touch the left or right arrow under Content to select Photo Touch Copy It Copying on specialty media Making transparencies 1 uu A WwW N O oOo N OO Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document Touch Copy to and then touch the tray that
5. Installing the printer on a wireless network Windows Before you install the printer on a wireless network make sure that Your wireless network is set up and working properly e The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on Additional printer setup 43 a A Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready s 3 Click Install 4 Click Agree 5 Click Suggested 6 Click Wireless Network Attach Additional printer setup 44 7 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer Note After the printer is configured the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly 8 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the software installation Note Basic is the recommended path to choose Choose Advanced only if you want to customize your installation 9 To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer follow steps 2 through 6 and step 8 for each computer Installing the printer on a wireless network Macintosh Prepare to configure the printer 1 Locate the printer MAC address on the sheet that shipped with the print
6. Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Click E mail Shortcut Setup Type a unique name for the recipient and then enter the e mail address Note If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma Select the scan settings Format Content Color and Resolution Enter a shortcut number and then click Add If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Creating an e mail shortcut using the touch screen 1 2 On the home screen touch E mail Type the recipient s e mail address To create a group of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address Touch Save as Shortcut Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Enter Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information 102 E mailing E mailing a document Sending an e mail using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Se 1 Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glas
7. e Best Fit is the factory default setting Fit Height Fit Width Orientation Sets the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Rev Portrait Rev Landscape XPS menu Menu item Description Print Error Pages Prints a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Note Off is the factory default setting On Booklet Adjustments menu The Booklet Adjustments menu is available if a booklet finisher is installed You can select various adjustments from this menu when printing booklets Understanding printer menus 198 To access the Booklet Adjustments menu 1 Turn the printer off 2 Hold down and 8 while turning the printer on 3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration Menu appears 4 Touch the down arrow until Booklet Adjustments appears 5 Touch Booklet Adjustments Menu item Description Size of paper Specifies the paper size A4 Note This setting defaults to the Tray 1 Size value A5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Folio Statement Universal A3 Tabloid JIS B4 Total number of sheets Specifies the total number of sheets in a booklet 1 2 sheets Note The factory default setting is 1 2 sheets 3 sheets 4 sheets 5 7 sheets 8 15 sheets Adjust for folding overlap Select top or bottom overlap based on printed output Top overlap Bottom overlap
8. Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add e For AppleTalk printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 O UAUWN From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click AppleTalk Select the printer from the list Click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier 1 O COON OU BW N a O From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications Double click Utilities Double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility From the Printer List click Add Choose the Default Browser tab Click More Printers From the first pop up menu choose AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk zone Select the printer from the list Click Add Note If the printer doesn t show up in the list you may need to add it using the IP address Contact your system support person for assistance 49 Additional printer setup 50 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port When a new network Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed in the printer the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated because the printer will be assigned a new IP address All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address in order to print to it over the network Notes e Ifthe
9. Item Description Ta Press to return to the home screen Start Press to initiate the current job indicated on the display From the home screen press to start a copy job with the default settings If pressed while a job is scanning the button has no effect Indicator light Off The power is off Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green tThe printer is on but idle Blinking red Operator intervention is needed Stop Stops all printer activity A list of options is offered once Stopped appears on the display 9 Front USB port Insert a USB flash drive to send data to the printer 10 Common Access Card An option that limits the use of certain printer functions to authenticated users A reader common access card is required for use Understanding the home screen After the printer is turned on and a short warm up period occurs the display shows the following basic screen which is referred to as the home screen Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or to respond to messages Learning about the printer 17 HELD JOBS l gt J Ready Manus 2 mnie Touch any button to begin 7 6 5 4 3 Displayitem item Opens the Copy menus Note From the home screen you can also access the Copy menus by pressing a number on the keypad Opens the E mail menus Opens the menus The
10. Warning Potential Damage System board electrical components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors Note This operation requires a 2 Phillips screwdriver 1 Gently insert the system board into the printer Additional printer setup 36 2 Replace the cover screws and then turn them clockwise 3 Tighten the screws firmly Installing hardware options Order of installation CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer e Printer stand or
11. Adjust for skew during booklet making Select skew direction based on printed output Clockwise skew Counter clockwise skew Help menu The Help menu consists of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs They contain reference information about using the printer and performing tasks You may select to print each one individually or select Print all guides to print all of them at one time English French German and Spanish translations are stored in the printer Other translations are available on the Software and Documentation CD Understanding printer menus 199 Menu item Description Print all guides Prints all the guides Copy guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings E mail guide Provides information about sending e mails using addresses shortcut numbers or the address book and changing settings Fax guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers shortcut numbers or the address book and changing settings FTP guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address shortcut numbers or the address book and changing settings Information guide Provides help in locating additional information Print defects guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints Supplies guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies Maintaining the printer 200 Maintaining the printer Periodically certain tasks are requ
12. Change lt input src gt to lt Custom Type Name gt 220 Change lt input src gt to lt Custom Type Name gt load lt orientation gt 220 Change lt input src gt to lt size gt 221 Change lt input src gt to lt size gt load lt orientation gt 221 Change lt input src gt to lt type gt lt size gt 221 Change lt input src gt to lt type gt lt size gt load lt orientation gt 222 Check lt input src gt guides 222 Check lt input src gt orientation or guides 222 Close cover lt x gt 222 Close door lt x gt 222 Close surface H 222 Disk corrupted 223 Disk Full Scan Job Canceled 223 Empty hole punch box 223 Fax memory full 223 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 223 Fax Station Name not setup 223 Fax Station Number not set up 223 Insert Tray lt x gt 224 Load lt input src gt with lt Custom String gt 224 Load lt input src gt with lt Custom Type Name gt 224 Load lt input src gt with lt size gt 225 Load lt input src gt with lt type gt lt size gt 224 Load lt src gt with lt x gt 224 Load Manual Feeder with lt Custom String gt 225 Load Manual Feeder with lt Custom Type Name gt 225 Load Manual Feeder with lt size gt 226 Load Manual Feeder with lt type gt lt size gt 226 Load manual feeder with lt x gt 225 313 Load Staples 226 Memory full cannot print faxes 226 Remove paper from lt linked bin set name gt 226 Remove
13. LEXMARK X860de X862de X864de User s Guide March 2012 www lexmark com Machine type s 7500 Model s 432 632 832 Contents 2 Contents Sarety INTONA O esecaseceescoccacsosasesetcseteusccenacsevdsdeveanstcwesseewsecdoessavemevesenevessuoan Learning about the printer sessessesseesescoessesoessessesosssosssesoesoessessessessoeseesee J Thank you for choosing this printer sesessessenserseereessressrrsrreerreresrrsserssresersrrrerrseeessresererrrerrsrrersrererreeese 9 Finding information about the printer ssssseesessrsscererssesssresrssrrserrsesssrrsrererrsreseesserssrestererrserssreerereerseene 9 Selecting AWOCATION for the DIMO ceneri nai e T E EATE sone 10 Per CONS aO a E dvenescanaiatlosswesiasenecaussasstaanenstaeeeaes eae 12 Basic TUMCLIONS OF NE SCONE ireren e E AEE semantauneneinaasenennnauane 13 Understanding the ADF and scanner Glass ccccsscccscccssecceececenceesececncceucecnceeeecesnecseeceseaeessucegneeeesseses 14 Understanding the printer control Datel sarcicrcsseccinncenrcasatnanenesincesineoareasaaticnesdattsenerwantar Eae 15 Understanding the NOME SCOE insisi aan entree ter anne ee tHe Sener ene ener arene eer eee eee 16 Usne UN GOUIGI S Ce DUONS ase seine phicesa ie eee EE a 18 Minimizing your printer s environmental iMpact cccscscsssssscecssescseseee 23 Saving paper aNd TONE esrardan a aiina e iie 23 BN EEEE A E ANT EE EE AE RE A AN E E TE AE E E E A E 23 Reducc
14. Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use Touch Done on O U A W N Touch Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document the scanning screen appears To cancel the copy job touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears Once the job is canceled the copy screen appears Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed 1 Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen or press x on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The remaining print job is canceled The home screen appears Copying 96 Understanding the copy screens and options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy e Touch a paper size button to select it as the Copy from setting The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Copy from is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Copy from is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Copy to This option opens a screen where yo
15. Ask the person who sent you the fax to Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory e Resend the fax There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection e Increase the fax scan resolution if possible THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when you experience faded print replace the cartridge MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Fax Settings Troubleshooting 273 4 Click Analog Fax Setup 5 In the Max Speed box click on one of the following 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 6 Click Submit Solving option problems Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the printer from the wall outlet 3 Check the connection between the option and the printer MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list I
16. check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Cannot scan from a computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Solving fax problems Caller ID is not shown Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Troubleshooting 270 Cannot send or receive a fax These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appear
17. choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click AppleTalk Select the printer from the list Click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier a gt NQ 0 aao oo From the Go menu choose Applications Double click Utilities Double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility From the Printer List click Add Choose the Default Browser tab Click More Printers From the first pop up menu choose AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk zone Select the printer from the list Click Add Additional printer setup 52 Setting up serial printing In serial printing data is transferred one bit at a time Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available After installing the serial port you will need to configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the serial port on your printer 1 Set the parameters in the printer a b c d e From the printer control panel navigate to the menu with port settings Locate the submenu with serial port settings Make any necessary changes to the serial settings Save the new settings Print a menu settings page 2 Install the printer driver a gt Q OO aan o m n In
18. document Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document Orientation This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation Binding Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scanning to an FTP address 125 Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most W
19. gt WAS B SE PET aE o AMANE gt TER a UE FSS LIRA EES BIRRA ERAON EARLE BLE Re ait H a PE E PREIL TER India emissions notice This device uses very low power low range RF communication that has been tested and found not to cause any interference whatsoever The manufacturer is not responsible in case of any disputes arising out of requirement of permissions from any local authority regulatory bodies or any organization required by the end user to install and operate this product at his premises ARRAY SR YLT ae YA sed A HF Utd HA Lo RF GSYMGM p WT get formar Wer fear or Gar a ae wear war fh ae fot Wh ger a Ba BA sel Gea Sam AAA yale EN sa SHS GT AY MTT wate vd Caled oe ed fot rda wre Pare feral a fee UIST SST WT HH Sl Ted G dae ve fare aH RA 4 fatratar forte at zs Notices 300 Notice to users in the European Union This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 2005 32 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy using products Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark Internation
20. photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press 7 and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad Using the address book Note The address book feature is enabled if it contains at least one entry 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Fax Touch Search Address Book U A WwW N Using the virtual keyboard type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find Note Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time Touch Search Touch the name to add it to the Fax to list Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses O Oo N O Touch Fax It Faxing 116 Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax Settings range from Standard fastest speed to Ultra Fine slowest speed best quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanne
21. printer RAM or printer hard disk the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value e Ifthe printer is turned off all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted Description Wiping Mode Sets the wiping mode to Auto Manual or Off Automatic Method Single pass Multiple pass Manual Method Single pass Multiple pass Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Notes e This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed e Single pass is the default setting e Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Notes e This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed e Single pass is the default setting e Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass method only Understanding printer menus 155 Menu item Description Scheduled Met
22. 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned None ignores the Select Paper Feed command Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Man Env Off None 0 199 Tray Renumber Lets you view the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder View Factory Def even if it has not been installed MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T2 Default 4 T3 Default 5 T4 Default 20 T5 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Tray Renumber Returns all tray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Restore Defaults Yes No Understanding printer menus HTML menu Menu item Font Name Albertus MT Antique Olive Apple Chancery Arial MT Avant Garde Bodoni Bookman Chicago Clarendon Cooper Black Copperplate Coronet Courier Eurostile Garamond Geneva Gill Sans Goudy Helvetica Hoefler Text Menu item Font Size 1 255 pt Scale 1 400 Orientation Portrait Landscape Margin Size 8 255 mm Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers Joanna MT Letter Gothic Lubalin Gothic Marigold 196 Description Sets the default font for HTML documents Notes e The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do not specify a font e The following fonts appear only if the appropriate DBCS font card is installed HG GothicB MSung Light MD_DotumChe and MingMT Light MonaLisa Recut Monaco New CenturySbk New York Optima Oxford Pal
23. 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Options Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver Advanced Imaging Custom Job Separator Sheets Margin Shift Edge Erase Header Footer Create Booklet Overlay Advanced Duplex and Save as Shortcut settings Create Booklet This option creates a sequence of collated output that when folded or folded and stapled forms a booklet half the page size of the original document and with all the pages in order Notes Create Booklet is incompatible with Staple Hole Punch Margin Shift and Paper Saver e f Create Booklet is on then turning Margin Shift on will turn off Create Booklet although the duplex value from Create Booklet will stay on Paper Saver This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page Paper Saver is also called N up printing The N stands for Number For example 2 up would print two pages of your document on a single page and 4 up would print four pages of your document on a single page Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page Advanced Imaging This option lets you adjust Background Removal Contrast Shadow Detail Scan Edge to Edge Color Dropout Auto Color Negative Image Sharpness and Mirror Image before you copy the document Custom Job This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Note Custom Job may not
24. 2 After entering the Station Name touch Submit 3 When Station Number appears enter the printer fax number 4 After entering the Station Number touch Submit Faxing 108 Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup Click inside the Station Name box and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes Click inside the Station Number box and then enter the printer fax number HO UW A WN Click Submit Choosing a fax connection You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone an answering machine or a computer modem To determine the best way to set up the printer see the following table Notes e The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet Other devices such as a telephone or answering machine can be successfully attached to pass through the printer as described in the setup steps e If you want a digital connection such as ISDN DSL or ADSL a third party device such as a DSL filter is required Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly e You d
25. 265 partial document or photo copies 267 poor copy quality 266 poor scanned image quality 268 scanner unit does not close 265 troubleshooting display display is blank 219 display shows only diamonds 219 troubleshooting fax blocking junk faxes 117 caller ID is not shown 269 can receive but not send faxes 272 can send but not receive faxes 271 cannot send or receive a fax 270 received fax has poor print quality 272 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 276 troubleshooting print error reading USB drive 262 held jobs do not print 263 incorrect characters print 264 incorrect margins 279 jammed page does not reprint 276 job prints from wrong tray 264 job prints on wrong paper 264 job takes longer than expected 263 jobs do not print 262 Large jobs do not collate 264 multiple language PDFs do not print 262 paper curl 280 paper frequently jams 276 tray linking does not work 264 unexpected page breaks occur 265 troubleshooting print quality blank pages 277 clipped images 278 ghost images 278 gray background 279 poor transparency quality 287 print irregularities 280 print is too dark 281 print is too light 282 print quality test pages 277 repeating defects 283 skewed print 283 solid black streaks 283 solid white streaks 283 streaked horizontal lines 284 streaked vertical lines 285 toner fog or background shading 285 toner rubs off 286 toner specks 286 troubleshooting printer options 2 000 s
26. 54 setting up serial printing 52 setting up the printer on a wired network Macintosh 47 on a wired network Windows 47 Setup menu 186 shipping the printer 215 shortcuts creating e mail 101 fax destination 113 114 314 FTP destination 123 124 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 223 SMTP Setup menu 151 Some held jobs were not restored 228 Standard Network menu 144 standard tray loading 55 Standard USB menu 146 staple cartridges ordering 204 staple jam 289 staple error 253 status of supplies checking 202 storing paper 69 supplies 202 subject and message information adding to e mail 103 Substitute Size menu 136 supplies conserving 202 status of 202 storing 202 supplies ordering 203 cleaning kit 204 maintenance kit 203 photoconductors 203 staple cartridges 204 system board accessing 28 reinstalling 35 T TCP IP menu 148 telecommunication notices 295 296 297 tips card stock 78 envelopes 77 labels paper 78 letterhead 75 transparencies 77 toner cartridges recycling 26 replacing 204 toner darkness adjusting 86 touch screen buttons 18 Index transparencies loading 62 making 88 tips 77 tray linking 65 tray unlinking 65 trays linking 64 65 unlinking 64 65 troubleshooting checking an unresponsive printer 219 checking an unresponsive scanner 267 contacting Customer Support 287 solving basic printer problems 219 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond
27. CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Pull the jam up and toward you Yy Note If the jam does not move immediately stop pulling Push down and pull the green lever to make it easier to remove the jam Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close Door A Troubleshooting 240 203 230 231 paper jams 203 paper jam 1 Open Door A by pushing the release latch up and lowering the door AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Open Door E by pushing the release latch and lowering the door 241 Troubleshooting 3 Pull the jam up N j zq SUNS To i 4 4 y x l 7 fp A 3 L J FEIA mE Al J y 6 M j Ke eG Ce a Ss fom Ce ON pm Ce K J CG oe eS 2 y W 4 Close Door E 5 Close Door A 230 paper jam 1 Open Door D Troubleshooting 242 2 Remove the jam N 3 Close Door D 4 Open Door A by pushing the release latch up and lowering the door AN C
28. Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image Sharpness 0 5 Print Settings Menu item 184 Description Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Description Specifies the number of copies to print Paper Source Tray lt x gt MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Collate Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print from the flash drive Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Notes e Off is the factory default setting No pages will be collated e The On setting st
29. MESSAGES Clear any error messages THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the print becomes faded replace the print cartridge THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 201 THE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK Adjust the density of the copy CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner UNWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND e Increase the background removal setting e Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting Troubleshooting PATTERNS MOIR APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT e On the Copy screen select the Text Photo or Printed Image icon e Rotate the original document on the scanner glass e On the Copy screen adjust the scale setting TEXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING On the Copy screen touch the Text icon e Decrease the background removal setting Increase the contrast setting Decrease the shadow detail setting THE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED e On the Copy screen select the Printed Image icon e Decrease the background removal setting Partial document or photo copies These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOC
30. Off means the printer does not store job statistics The statistics include a record of print errors the print time the job size in bytes the requested paper size and type the total number of printed pages and the total number of copies requested Job Accounting is available only when a printer hard disk is installed and working properly It should not be Read Write or Write protected Job Buffer Size should not be set to 100 Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to reset The menu selection is updated Understanding printer menus Menu item Resource Save Print All Order Alphabetically Newest First Oldest First Finishing menu Menu item Sides Duplex 2 sided 1 sided Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Copies 1 999 Blank Pages Do Not Print Print 188 Description Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in RAM when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs e The On setting retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory 38 Memory Full appears and downloads are not deleted Specifies the order in which held and confident
31. Photograph Darkness 1 9 Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax Notes e Text is used when the document is mostly text e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art e Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Dial Prefix A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers Dialing Prefix Rules Establishes a dialing prefix rule Prefix Rule lt x gt Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number Automatic Redial 0 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Redial Frequency Specifies the number of minutes between redials 1 200 Behind a PABX Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the pri
32. Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending Notices 296 machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine South Africa telecommunications notice This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subj
33. Remove paper from standard output bin 227 removing the optional trays 211 Repeat print jobs 79 printing from Macintosh computer 80 printing from Windows 79 Replace all originals if restarting job 227 228 replacing photoconductor 206 reports viewing 217 Reports menu 142 Reserve print jobs 79 printing from Macintosh computer 80 printing from Windows 79 resolution fax changing 116 Restore Held Jobs 227 S safety information 7 8 Scan Document Too Long 228 scan quality improving 130 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 269 partial document or photo scans 269 scan was not successful 268 scanner unit does not close 265 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 268 scanner Automatic Document Feeder ADF 14 functions 13 registration 201 scanner glass 14 Scanner ADF Cover Open 228 scanner glass cleaning 201 scanner glass flatbed copying using 88 scanner jam 228 Scanner Jam Access Cover Open 228 scanning to acomputer 127 improving scan quality 130 scanning to a flash drive 128 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 123 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 124 improving FTP quality 126 using shortcut numbers 123 using the address book 123 using the keypad 122 Security Audit Log menu 155 Serial lt x gt 228 serial port 52 serial printing setting up 52 Set Date Time menu 155 setting paper size 54 paper type 54 TCP IP address 148 Universal Paper Size
34. Smooth Normal Rough Preprinted Texture Smooth Normal Rough Colored Texture Smooth Normal Rough Light Texture Smooth Normal Rough Heavy Texture Smooth Normal Rough Rough Texture Smooth Normal Rough Custom lt x gt Texture Smooth Normal Rough Description Specifies the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray Note Rough is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Rough is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 138 Paper Loading menu Card Stock Loading Duplex Off Recycled Loading Duplex Off Labels Loading Duplex Off Bond Loading Duplex Off Letterhead Loading Duplex Of
35. The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Additional printer setup 27 Additional printer setup Installing internal options A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards you can also use them to locate a card for removal Available internal options e Mem
36. US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Off Long edge Short edge Notes e Offis the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Understanding printer menus 176 Menu item Description JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Use Multi Page TIFF Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Manual Env MP Feeder Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin lt x gt E mail Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Custom Job scanning Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes e Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Spe
37. all held Jobs buffered jobs and parked jobs Job accounting information is not affected Note Delete Now is the default setting Prints a list of all stored job statistics or deletes the information from the printer hard disk Notes e A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available e Selecting Print prints a list of statistics e Clear deletes all job statistics stored on the printer hard disk e The Clear selection will not appear if Job Accounting is set to MarkTrack using NPA Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes e When Activate is selected all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed e To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn the printer off or reset the printer Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of black on a page The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the contrast lighting of the display Notes e 5 is the factory default setting e A higher setting makes the display appear lighter e A lower setting makes the display appear darker Adjusts the brightness of the backlight on the display Notes e 5 is the factory default setting e A higher setting makes the display appear lighter e A lower setting makes the display appear darker Descripti
38. an icon of that overlay will be available Advanced Duplex This option controls whether the documents are one sided or two sided what orientation your original documents have and how your documents are bound Save as Shortcut This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut Improving copy quality Question When should I use Text e Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy and preserving images mode copied from the original document is not a concern e Text mode is recommended for receipts carbon copy forms and documents that contain only text or fine line art When should use e Use Text Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a mixture of text Text Photo mode and graphics e Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures Copying 99 Question When should use Printed Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone E graphics such as documents Image mode printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper Photograph mode print When should use Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high quality photograph or inkjet E mailing 100 E mailing Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine c
39. are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com If you don t have access to the Internet you can contact Lexmark by mail Lexmark International Inc Bldg 004 2 CSC 740 New Circle Road NW Lexington KY 40550 USA 2009 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved Notices 289 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries MarkTrack and PrintCryption are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies
40. assign an IP address to the printer Print the network setup page from the printer For information on printing a network setup page see Printing a network setup page on page 40 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP IP section of the network setup page You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer Install the drivers and add the printer a Install a PPD file on the computer 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive Double click the installer package for the printer From the Welcome screen click Continue Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file U BW N Click Continue after viewing the license agreement and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement Select a Destination and then click Continue y O From the Easy Install screen click Install 8 Type the user password and then click OK All the necessary software is installed on the computer 9 Click Restart when installation is complete b Add the printer e For IP printing Additional printer setup In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 O UAWN From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier 1 O UAWN 7 From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications Double click Utilities
41. be available on all models Copying 98 Separator Sheets This option places a blank piece of paper between copies pages and print jobs The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on Margin Shift This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole punch copies Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy will be cropped Edge Erase This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the selected area leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper Header Footer This option turns on the Date Time Page number Bates number or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location Overlay This option creates a watermark or message that overlays the content of your copy You can choose between Urgent Confidential Copy and Draft or you can enter a custom message in the Enter custom text field The word you pick will appear faintly in large print across each page Note A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person When a custom overlay is created a button with
42. buffers jobs on the printer hard disk e The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Auto Notes On e Auto is the factory default setting e The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol e The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs USB With ENA Sets the network address netmask or gateway information for an external print ENA Address server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable ENA Netmask Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print ENA Gateway server through the USB port Network Reports menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt Reports or Network Reports Menu item Description Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the current network setup Print NetWare Setup Notes Page amp e The Setup Page contains information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address e The NetWare Setup Page menu item appears only on models that support NetWare and shows information about NetWare setti
43. d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette
44. disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Understanding printer menus 187 Menu item Description Print Area Sets the logical and physical printable area Normal Whole Page Notes e This menu does not appear if Edge to Edge is enabled in the printer Setup menu Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary The Whole Page setting allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Download Target Sets the storage location for downloads RAM Flash Disk e RAM is the factory default setting Notes e Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off Storing downloads in RAM is temporary This menu appears only if a flash and or disk option is installed Job Accounting Specifies whether the printer stores statistical information about the most recent print jobs on the hard disk Notes e Off is the factory default setting
45. does not know the actual paper size that is loaded in a tray due to an incorrect paper orientation setting or because tray guides are not in the proper location Try one or more of the following e Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded e Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Close door lt x gt Close the specified door Close cover lt x gt Close the specified cover to clear the message Close surface H Close the specified cover to clear the message Troubleshooting 223 Disk corrupted The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk and the hard disk cannot be repaired The hard disk must be reformatted Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message Note Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk Empty the hole punch box Empty the hole punch box and then reinsert it into the finisher Wait for the message to clear Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator An error occurred on the Weblink server or the server is not configured properly Touch Continue to clear the message If th
46. down arrow until Print Fonts appears and then touch Print Fonts 5 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the printer hard disk 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch F9 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch the down arrow until Print Directory appears 5 Touch Print Directory Printing the print quality test pages Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems 1 Turn the printer off 2 Hold down and 3 while turning the printer on 3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears 4 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears 5 Touch Print Quality Pages Menu 6 Touch Print Quality Pages Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen or press on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel Printing 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users In Windows Vista Click B Click Control Panel Click Hardware and Sound Click Printers Double click the printer icon O a A W N P Select the job to cancel 7 From the keyboard press Delete In Windows XP 1 Click Start 2 From Printers and Faxes double click the printer icon 3
47. e Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or feeder ENSURE THAT THE TONER IS DISTRIBUTED EVENLY WITHIN THE TONER CARTRIDGE Remove the toner cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner and then reinstall it THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER Replace the used toner cartridge with a new one Streaked horizontal lines These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER IS SMEARED Select another tray or feeder to feed the paper for the job e From the printer control panel Paper Menu select the Default Source e For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties e For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the toner cartridge THE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR Check the paper path around the toner cartridge A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clear any paper you see Troubleshooting THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Streaked vertical lines N DE DE CHE These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following B THE TONER IS SMEARED Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job e From the printer co
48. e Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Print irregularities These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY e Load paper from a fresh package e Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog CHECK THE PAPER Avoid textured paper with rough finishes 280 Troubleshooting 281 THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge Lowappears or when the print becomes faded replace the toner cartridge THE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser Print is too dark AN ABC DEF These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting is too dark the Brightness setting is too dark or the Contrast setting is too high e Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu e For Windows users change these settings from Print Properties e For Macintosh users change these settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DU
49. energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC and 2006 95 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Notices 294 Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requireme
50. error Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer Troubleshooting e Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer or print server 55 Unsupported option in slot lt x gt lt x gt is a slot on the printer system board Try one or more of the following 1 Turn the printer power off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer power back on 56 Parallel port lt x gt disabled lt x gt is the number of the parallel port Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port e Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Serial port lt x gt disabled lt x gt is the number of the serial port Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the serial port e Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Standard parallel port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port e Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Standard USB port disabled
51. is greater than the configured size limit Sends an e mail only when the address contains the domain name such as a company domain name Notes e E mail can only be sent to the specified domain e The limit is one domain Defines the path name Note Defines the path For example directory path The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path name ae Specifies the format of the file Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e mail Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e mail Notes e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art e Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Text is used when the document is mostly text Understanding printer menus 175 Menu item Description Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color Note Gray is the factory default setting Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 75 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 200 300 400 600 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Note Letter is the
52. items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer for example a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer Sending a document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax The difference is that you are sending the information over your network instead of over the phone line Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home screen touch FTP 4 Type the FTP address 5 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address 123 Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do no
53. minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not e Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard Notes e Yes is the factory default setting e After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen the default becomes No Notes e The initial setting is determined by your Country selection in the initial setup wizard e Changing this setting also changes the Units of Measurement setting in the Universal Setup menu and the default for each input source in the Paper Size Paper Type menu Sets the amount of light from an optional output bin Notes In Normal Standby Mode the factory default setting is Bright e In Power Saver Mode the factory default setting is Dim Understanding printer menus 158 Menu item Description Alarms Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator Alarm Control intervention Cartridge Alarm Available selections for each alarm type are Staple Alarm Off Hole Punch Alarm Single Continuous Notes e Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control Single sounds three quick beeps Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm and Staple Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds The Staple Alarm is available only when the finishe
54. new name instead of Custom Type lt x gt To change a Custom Type lt x gt name from the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser Note The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer In the address bar type the IP address of the network printer for example 192 264 263 17 Press Enter From the navigation panel of the initial page click Configuration Click Paper Menu Click Custom Name N ODO Wl BP WN Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name lt x gt box Note This custom name will replace a custom type lt x gt name under the Custom Types and Paper Size Type menus Loading paper and specialty media 8 Click Submit Submitting Selection appears 9 Click Custom Types Custom Types appears followed by your custom name 10 Select a Paper Type setting from the picklist next to your custom name 11 Click Submit Submitting Selection appears 66 Paper and specialty media guidelines 67 Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper guidelines Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock Weight The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib bond grain long Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly causing jams For best performance use 75 g m7 20 Ib bond grain long paper For paper sm
55. number and then enter the next fax number Touch Save as Shortcut Enter a name for the shortcut Touch OK ao nN QA UI Touch Fax It to send the fax or touch to return to the home screen Changing the fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup 5 Select the list entry and then update it using the text box 6 Click Modify Faxing 115 Using shortcuts and the address book Using fax shortcuts Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine You can assign shortcut numbers when creating permanent fax destinations Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server A shortcut number 1 99999 can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not place postcards
56. one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters The definition of a set depends on the scan source e f you scan a document on the scanner glass a set consists of one page e f you scan multiple pages using the ADF a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty e f you scan one page using the ADF a set consists of one page For example Copying 94 1 ao wn co UA A W N 10 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Options Touch Custom Job Touch On Touch Done Touch Copy It When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears Load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Note If required change the job settings If you have another document to scan lo
57. order a maintenance kit The maintenance kit contains all the items necessary to replace the pick rollers the charge roll the transfer roller and the fuser Note Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit The pick rollers charge roll transfer roller and fuser can also be individually ordered and replaced as necessary Partname name Part Partnumber For Forprinter s Maintenance kit low 40X2375 X860 X862 X864 voltage Maintenance kit high 40X2376 X860 X862 X864 ae Maintenance Maintenance kit 100 volt volt 40X2377 X860 X862 X864 Maintenance kit for the 40X2734 X860 X862 X864 ADF Maintaining the printer 204 Ordering staple cartridges When Staples Lowor Staples Empty appears order the specified staple cartridge For more information see the illustrations inside the stapler door Part name Part number Staple Cartridges 3 pack 25A0013 Ordering a cleaning kit Use the wet and dry wipes from the cleaning kit to clean the scanner glass and touch screen Part name Part number Cleaning kit wet and dry wipes 40X0392 Replacing supplies Replacing the toner cartridge When 88 Cartridge low 88 yy Replace cartridge or88 Replace cartridge to continue appears or when print becomes faded 1 Turn the printer off 2 Open the front door Maintaining the printer 205 3 Grasp the handle and pull out the cartridge
58. panel press and hold and I while you turn the printer on 3 Release both buttons when a progress bar appears on the display The printer performs its power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears 4 Press the up or down arrow until Short edge Printing appears and then press the arrow to the right of Short edge Printing 5 Press the left or right arrows until you see Enable and then press Submit Submitting Change appears 6 Press Back 7 Press Exit Config Menu Linking and unlinking trays Linking trays Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies When one linked tray is empty paper feeds from the next linked tray When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays the trays are automatically linked The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu The Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the Paper Size Type menu Unlinking trays Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray Loading paper and specialty media 65 To unlink a tray change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray e Paper Type for example Plain Pa
59. positive value will lighten them and conserve toner Adjusts the degree of difference between levels of gray in printed output Notes e QO is the factory default setting e Higher settings show more difference between levels of gray Description Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Notes e Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected e Selecting Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that were not restored from the disk Formats the flash memory Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is formatting Notes e A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available The flash memory option card must not be Read Write or Write protected e Selecting Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory No cancels the format request Understanding printer menus Menu item Delete Downloads on Disk Delete Now Do Not Delete Job Acct Stat Print Clear Hex Trace Activate Coverage Estimator On LCD Contrast 1 10 LCD Brightness 1 10 PDF menu Menu item Scale to Fit Yes No 192 Description Removes downloads from the printer hard disk including
60. printer has a static IP address that will stay the same then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations If the computers are configured to print to the printer by a network name that will stay the same instead of by IP address then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly If the wired connection remains connected then the wireless configuration will complete but the wireless ISP will not be active In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection disconnect the wired connection turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on again This will enable the wireless ISP Only one network connection at a time is active If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless you must first turn the printer off connect the cable to switch to a wired connection or disconnect the cable to switch to a wireless connection and then turn the printer back on again For Windows users 1 2 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address Click B or click Start and then click Run 3 Inthe Start Search or Run box type control printers O Oo N O 10 11 12 Press Enter or click OK The printe
61. prints using the linked tray Tabloid Automatic size sensing is not supported for Oficio Folio or Statement JIS B4 paper sizes The 2000 sheet tray supports A4 Letter and Legal paper sizes Note Only installed trays drawers and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 133 Menu item Description Tray lt x gt Type Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type lt x gt MIP Feeder Size A4 A3 Tabloid JIS B4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope Other Envelope Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type lt x gt is the factory default setting for all other trays e If available a user defined name appears instead of Custom Type lt x gt e Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the job prints using the linked tray Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes e From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item e A4 is the international fact
62. recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable INNO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Notices 304 LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT BY USING THIS PRO
63. recovery is active The message clears A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts Scan Document Too Long The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages Touch Cancel Job to clear the message Scanner ADF Cover Open The ADF cover is open The message clears when the cover is closed Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner Clear all original documents from the scanner Scanner Jam Access Cover Open Close the bottom ADF door to clear the message Serial lt x gt The printer is using a serial cable connection The serial port is the active communication link Some held jobs were not restored Touch Continue to delete the specified job Note Some held jobs are not restored They stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible 30 Invalid refill change cartridge Remove the print cartridge and then install a supported one Troubleshooting 229 31 yy Replace defective or missing cartridge The toner cartridge is either missing or not functioning properly Try one or more of the following e Remove the toner cartridge and then reinstall it e Remove the toner cartridge and then install a new one 32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device Remove the print cartridge and then install a supported one 34 Short paper Try one or more of the following e Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and pri
64. reed Problems sits aicassctss times e E EE E E E E 276 SOIVING phintau alty Propilen Susien T a T TO O a a 277 CONTACTING CUSTOMEF SUD DOM ennen a a N E E 287 NOLUCOS cnr EE a ENa OO PRO GUICE LAVORA O era a a aa a secon emenienccamaeeuee 288 Contents 6 19 G10 gata 0 a S Seen eee ment ae nt Nr ent Pr SUE Ree LEY AEE Oe ee eee een tee ee 288 POWE CONSUINIDUIO I aoea T E OA Conus amen heen ens 292 WINGO PEET EEIE OE AEE A A AESI IET S A E EEE se OS Safety information 7 Safety information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations A This product uses a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI Monthly testing of the GFCI is recommended CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions Use care when you replace a lithium battery CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Replace it only with the same or an equiva
65. snaps securely into place 8 Close Door G Priming Stapler appears Priming ensures the stapler is functioning properly Troubleshooting 28x paper jam 284 paper jam 1 Open Door F 2 Remove the jam 3 Close Door F 256 Troubleshooting 257 4 Open Door G 5 Remove the jam 6 Close Door G 7 Lift Door H 8 Remove the jam 9 Close Door H Troubleshooting 285 286 paper jams 1 Lift Door H 2 Remove the jam 3 Close Door H 287 288 paper jams 1 Open Door F 258 Troubleshooting 2 Remove the jam 3 Close Door F 4 Open Door G 5 Remove the jam 6 Close Door G 290 294 paper jams 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF 2 Lift the ADF cover latch 3 Open the ADF cover and then remove any jammed paper 259 260 Troubleshooting 4 Raise the sheet guard 5 Turn the paper advance wheel to the left to remove any jammed pages 6 Close the ADF cover Troubleshooting 261 7 8 9 Open the scanner cover and remove any jammed pages Close the scanner cover Touch Continue 293 p
66. the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to Text Text Photo and all scan functions Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to USB job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Lets you automatically center the copy on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255
67. the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Options 5 Touch Separator Sheets Note Collate must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies If Collate is Off the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job 6 Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs Copying 93 e Between Pages 7 Touch Done 8 Touch Copy It Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes e The Paper Size must be set to Letter Legal A4 or B5 JIS e The Copy Size must be set to 100 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Select a duplex setting Touch Options Touch Paper Saver Select the desired output Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies O on ono UW A W N Touch Done a O Touch Copy It Creating a custom job job build The custom job or job build is used to combine
68. this bin Finisher Bin 2 e The paper capacity is 3 000 sheets when the standard finisher is installed e If booklet finisher is installed capacity is reduced to 1 500 sheets Printing 85 Finisher Bin 2 finishing features Size Two hole punch Three or Offset Single staple DEIR f o Four hole punch Note Supported Note Supported only if feeding only if feeding orientation is long orientation is long edge edge sooo k k e e r Foo a a e ss wyo o wo wo Mo v C Letter V Note Supported Note Supported only if feeding only if feeding orientation is long orientation is long C a a a Envelopes size a e a E For the Universal paper size the finishing edge must be at least 9 in 229 mm for a 3 hole punch and 10 in 254 mm for a 4 hole punch Punch Two three or four hole punch settings Single staple One staple Dual staple Two staples Finisher Bin 3 Bin 3 is available only when the booklet finisher is installed The paper capacity of Bin 3 booklet maker is 1 500 sheets or 18 sets of 15 page booklets Printing 86 Bin 3 finishing features Bi fold Booklet fold Saddle staple SEF The paper is loaded in the short edge orientation The short edge of the paper enters the printer first Bi fold Each page is individually folded and stacked separately Booklet fold A multiple page job is folded along the center into a single booklet Saddle staple A booklet f
69. tiquette produit situ e a l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit la d un probl me majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant a laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi par le laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of
70. unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may
71. warranty Lexmark warrants that this product lIs manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsi
72. with the holes toward the left side of the tray e When loading letterhead place the header toward the front of the tray 5 Insert the tray Loading the 2 000 sheet dual input trays The 2 000 sheet dual input drawer includes two trays an 850 sheet tray and a 1 150 sheet tray Although the trays are different in appearance they require the same process for loading paper 1 Pull the tray out Loading paper and specialty media 61 2 Squeeze the length guide tab inward as shown and slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface E D OI WANNA a E A iS Note Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line on the rear guide Overloading may cause jams 5 Insert the tray Loading paper and specialty media 62 Loading the multipurpose feeder The multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media such as transparencies postcards note cards and envelopes It can be used for single page or manual printing or as an additional tray The icons on the multipurpose feeder show you how to load the multipurpose feeder with paper how to turn an envelope for printing and how to load letterhead paper for simplex and duplex printing Note Do not add or remove paper when the printer is p
73. 1 Open Door A by pushing the release latch up and lowering the door A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Pull the jam up and toward you Yy Note If the jam does not move immediately stop pulling Push down and pull the green lever to make it easier to remove the jam Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close Door A Troubleshooting Clearing Area B 1 Open Door B 2 Pull the jam up and toward you f eg ay O ANG Ay S 3 Close Door B 4 Touch Continue 248 249 Troubleshooting Clearing Area C 1 Open Door C 2 Pull the jam up and toward you 3 Close Door C 4 Touch Continue Troubleshooting 250 250 paper jam 1 Remove the paper from the multipurpose feeder a SS SS NS 2 Flexthe sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 3 Load the paper into the multipurpose feeder 4 Adjust the paper guide to rest lightly against the edge of the paper 280 282 paper jams 280 281 paper jams 1 Open D
74. 102 using the address book 102 using the touch screen 102 F factory defaults restoring printer control panel menus 218 fax connection connecting the printer to the wall jack 109 connecting to a DSL line 109 connecting to a PBX or ISDN 110 fax connections distinctive ring service 110 regional adapters 111 Fax memory full 223 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu 164 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 172 fax quality improving 119 fax screen advanced options 119 options 118 119 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 223 Fax Station Name not set up 223 Fax Station Number not set up 223 fax troubleshooting blocking junk faxes 117 caller ID is not shown 269 can receive but not send faxes 272 can send but not receive faxes 271 cannot send or receive a fax 270 received fax has poor print quality 272 faxing canceling a fax job 117 118 changing resolution 116 choosing a fax connection 108 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 113 114 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 114 fax setup 107 forwarding faxes 120 holding faxes 120 improving fax quality 119 making a fax lighter or darker 116 sending a fax at a scheduled time 116 sending using the computer 113 sending using the printer control panel 112 setting the date and time 112 setting the outgoing fax name and number 112 using shortcuts 115 using the address book 115 viewing a fax log 117 FCC notices 290 295 298 fiber optic
75. 2 This paper size is supported only when the source is non size sensing or when size sensing is disabled 3 The printer trays cannot distinguish between B5 and Executive size paper when both sizes are loaded in the trays From the Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect Load either B5 or Executive size paper in the paper trays but not both Paper and specialty media guidelines 70 Paper size Dimensions Standard 500 sheet trays Tray 1 Multipurpose feeder and Tray 2 Executive 184 2 x 266 7 mm 7 25 x 10 5 in B aN RIO i Note Tunes 139 7 x 297 mm 5 5x117 in sensing off to 98 4 x 431 8 mm 3 8 x 17 in to support universal 89 x 297 mm 3 5 x 11 7 in for sizes that are close to the multipurpose feeder only standard media sizes 148 x 431 8 mm 5 83 x 17 in to J J 140 x 297 2 mm 5 51 x 11 7 in for the duplex unit only 7 3 4 Envelope 98 4 x 190 5 mm 3 875 x 7 5 in vi Monarch Other Envelope 98 4 7 x 431 8 mm inicio 8 x 17 in to 89 x 297 mm 3 5 x 11 7 in The printer trays cannot distinguish between A5 and statement size paper when both sizes are loaded in the printer trays From the Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect Load either A5 or statement size paper in the paper trays but not both This paper size is supported only when the source is non size sensing or when size sensing is disabled 3 The printer trays
76. 60 840 W X862 X864 documents The product is scanning hard copy documents 200 W The product is waiting for a print job 160 W Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet but the power switch is 0 5 W turned off The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Standby The product is in a high energy saving mode Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Power Saver This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Power Saver The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the EPA Sleep Mode The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Power Saver Timeout Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product in minutes 1 X860 5 X862 60 X864 Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate
77. 9 Complex page some data may not have printed 230 50 PPDS font error 230 500 sheet tray standard or optional loading 55 500 sheet trays installing 37 51 Defective flash detected 231 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 231 53 Unformatted flash detected 231 54 Network lt x gt software error 231 54 Serial option lt x gt error 231 54 Standard network software error 231 55 Unsupported option in slot 232 56 Parallel port lt x gt disabled 232 56 Serial port lt x gt disabled 232 56 Standard parallel port disabled 232 56 Standard USB port disabled 232 56 USB port lt x gt disabled 233 57 Configuration change held jobs were not restored 233 58 Too many bins attached 233 58 Too many disks installed 233 58 Too many flash options installed 233 58 Too many trays attached 234 61 Remove defective disk 234 62 Disk full 234 63 Unformatted disk 234 80 Routine maintenance needed 234 84 Insert photoconductor 234 84 Photoconductor abnormal 235 84 Photoconductor low 235 84 Replace photoconductor 235 850 sheet tray loading 60 88 Cartridge low 235 88 Replace cartridge to continue 235 Symbols scan to computer screen options 128 129 130 A Active NIC menu 144 address book fax using 115 ADF copying using 87 adjusting toner darkness 86 An error has occurred with the flash drive 220 AppleTalk menu 150 attaching cables 38 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 14 308 B Bin Setup menu 141 Booklet
78. AUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Troubleshooting 243 5 Open Door E by pushing the release latch and lowering the door N L 6 Pullthe jam up W 7 Close Door E 8 Close Door A 244 Troubleshooting 231 paper jam 1 Open Door D 2 Remove the jam A KEA N h f 3 Close Door D Troubleshooting 245 4 Open Door A by pushing the release latch up and lowering the door CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 5 Pull the jam up and toward you Y Note If the jam does not move immediately stop pulling Push down and pull the green lever to make it easier to remove the jam Make sure all paper fragments are removed 6 Close Door A Troubleshooting 246 24x paper jam Jam in Tray 1 1 Remove Tray 1 from the printer 2 Remove the jam 3 Insert Tray 1 If all jams are cleared then the printer resumes printing Troubleshooting 247 Clearing Area A
79. Adjustments menu 197 brightness adjusting 217 buttons home screen 16 buttons printer control panel 15 buttons touch screen 18 C cables Ethernet 38 USB 38 calling Customer Support 287 canceling a job from Macintosh 83 from the printer control panel 82 from Windows 83 card stock loading 62 tips 78 Change lt input src gt to lt Custom String gt 220 Change lt input src gt to lt Custom String gt load lt orientation gt 221 Change lt input src gt to lt Custom Type Name gt 220 Change lt input src gt to lt Custom Type Name gt load lt orientation gt 220 Change lt input src gt to lt size gt 221 Change lt input src gt to lt size gt load lt orientation gt 221 Change lt input src gt to lt type gt lt size gt 221 Change lt input src gt to lt type gt lt size gt load lt orientation gt 222 Check lt input src gt guides 222 Check lt input src gt orientation or guides 222 checking an unresponsive printer 219 checking an unresponsive scanner 267 checking device status on Embedded Web Server 217 checking virtual display on Embedded Web Server 216 Index cleaning exterior of the printer 200 scanner glass 201 cleaning kit ordering 204 clearing jams 289 staple error 253 Close cover lt x gt 222 Close door lt x gt 222 Close surface H 222 collating copies 92 color documents e mailing 104 Confidential print jobs 79 printing from Macintosh computer 80 printing from Windows 79
80. CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Notices 290 Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners AirPrint AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own ex
81. CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY e Load paper from a fresh package e Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared CHECK THE PAPER PATH The paper path is not clear Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path and then touch Continue Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam TURN ON JAM RECOVERY In the Setup menu Jam Recovery is set to Off Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch F9 3 Touch Settings Troubleshooting 277 Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears Touch Print Recovery Touch the right arrow next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears Touch Submit Touch O ON OO WwW A Solving print quality problems Isolating print quality problems To help isolate print quality problems print the print quality test pages 1 Turn the printer off 2 Load Letter or A4 size paper in the tray 3 Hold down and I while turning the printer on 4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears Ul Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears 6 Touch Print Quality Pages The print quality
82. Confidential Print menu 153 configuration information wireless network 42 configurations printer 12 Configure MP menu 135 configuring port settings 50 configuring the e mail settings 101 connecting the printer to distinctive ring service 110 regional adapters 111 conservation settings Power Saver 23 Quiet Mode 24 conserving supplies 202 contacting Customer Support 287 control panel printer 15 copy quality adjusting 91 improving 98 copy screen options 96 97 Copy Settings menu 160 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 265 partial document or photo copies 267 poor copy quality 266 poor scanned image quality 268 scanner unit does not close 265 copying adding a date and time stamp 94 adding an overlay message 95 adjusting quality 91 canceling a copy job 95 collating copies 92 custom job job build 93 document containing mixed paper sizes 90 enlarging 91 from one size to another 89 improving copy quality 98 making transparencies 88 multiple pages on one sheet 93 on both sides of the paper duplexing 91 photos 88 placing separator sheets between copies 92 quick copy 87 reducing 91 selecting a tray 89 to letterhead 89 using the ADF 87 using the scanner glass flatbed 88 Custom Bin Names menu 140 Custom Names menu 139 custom paper type assigning 65 Custom Scan Sizes menu 140 Custom Type lt x gt changing name 65 Custom Types menu 139 D date and time setting 112 Default Source menu 132 directory lis
83. DUCT YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This License Agreement Software License Agreement is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Lexmark International Inc Lexmark that to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers governs your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product The term Software Program includes machine readable instructions audio visual content such as images and recordings and associated media printed materials and electronic documentation whether incorporated into distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product 1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY Lexmark warrants that the media e g diskette or compact disk on which the Software Program if any is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty per
84. Darkness 1 9 Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the format of the FTP file Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP Notes e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art e Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print e Text is used when the document is mostly text Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color Note Gray is the factory default setting Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 179 Menu item Description Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6 in 3x 5in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default s
85. E TO HIGH HUMIDITY e Load paper from a fresh package e Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER Avoid textured paper with rough finishes CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the toner cartridge Troubleshooting Print is too light These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting is too light the Brightness setting is too light or the Contrast setting is too low e Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu e For Windows users change these settings from Print Properties e For Macintosh users change these settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY e Load paper from a fresh package e Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER Avoid textured paper with rough finishes CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper
86. Env MP Feeder Log Output Bin Specifies an output bin for the FTP log Standard Bin Bin lt x gt FTP bit Depth Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when 8 bit Color is set to Off 1 bit Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Base File Name Lets you enter a base file name Custom Job Scanning Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Background Removal Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Lets you automatically center the copy on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Color Dropout Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease Color Dropout the dropout None Notes Red Green e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Blue e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Understanding printer menus Menu item Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image Sharpness 0 5 Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version 1 2 1 6 C
87. Load either B5 or Executive size paper in the paper trays but not both Note The multipurpose feeder does not use auto size sensing and can support both B5 and Executive size print jobs The Size Sensing setting does not affect the multipurpose feeder settings 1 2 3 4 O On OD UI 10 Load either B5 or Executive size paper in a paper tray Turn the printer off Hold down and 8 while turning the printer on Release the buttons when the screen with the Progress Bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then Configuration Menu appears Touch the up or down arrow button until Size Sensing appears Touch Size Sensing Select Select Executive B5 Touch the left or right arrow button until the paper size you want appears Touch Submit Touch Exit Configuration Menu Loading the 2000 sheet high capacity feeder The high capacity feeder can hold 2 000 sheets of letter A4 Executive and JIS B5 paper 80 g m or 20 Ib 1 Pull the tray out Loading paper and specialty media 59 2 If you are loading paper with a different width or length then adjust the width and length guides 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 60 Loading paper and specialty media 4 Load paper in the tray with the print side down e Place pre punched paper
88. Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Header Footer Top right Top right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text 162 Description Specifies header footer information for the top left of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Top left e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specifies header footer information for the middle of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Top middle e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specifies header footer information for the top right of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Top right e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus Menu item Header Footer Bottom left Bottom left Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Header Footer Bottom middle Bottom middle Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Header Footer Bottom right Bottom right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Ent
89. On the job Off Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 161 Menu item Description Original Size Specifies the paper size of the original document Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6 in 3x 5in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Copy To Source Specifies the paper source for copy jobs Tray lt x gt Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Single Sheet Feeder Multi Sheet Feeder Auto Size Match Transparency Separators Places a sheet of paper between transparencies Note On is the factory default setting Separator Sheets Places a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs based on the value selected None Note None is the factory default setting Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Separator Source Specifies a paper source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Envelope Feeder Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job 1 9 Output Bin Specifies which output bin receives the copy after it is printed Standard Bin Bin lt x gt Number of Copies Specifies the number of copies for the copy job Understanding printer menus Menu item Header Footer Top left Top left Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Header Footer Top middle Top middle
90. Select the job to cancel 4 From the keyboard press Delete From the Windows taskbar When you send a job to print a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar 1 Double click the printer icon A list of print jobs appears in the printer window 2 Select a job to cancel 3 From the keyboard press Delete For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences 2 Click Print amp Fax and then double click the printer icon 3 From the printer window select the job to cancel 4 From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier 1 From the Go menu choose Applications 2 Double click Utilities and then double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility 3 Double click the printer icon 83 Printing 84 4 From the printer window select the job to cancel 5 From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon Supported finishing features Standard bin e The paper capacity is 300 sheets e Finishing options are not supported in this bin Envelopes are routed here Finisher Bin 1 e The paper capacity is 500 sheets of A4 Letter and 300 sheets of A3 Ledger e Envelopes A5 A6 and Statement are not supported in this bin e Finishing options are not supported in
91. Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 232 Troubleshooting 233 56 USB port lt x gt disabled lt x gt is the number of the USB port Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 57 Configuration change held jobs were not restored Since the time the jobs were stored on the printer hard disk something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs Possible changes include The printer firmware has been updated e Paper input output or duplex options needed for the print job were removed e The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the port The printer hard disk contains jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model Touch Continue to clear the message 58 Too many bins attached 1 Turn the printer power off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional bins 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer power back on 58 Too many disks installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the extra disks 4 Connect the power c
92. UMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Solving scanner problems Checking an unresponsive scanner If your scanner is not responding then make sure e The printer is turned on 267 e The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device e The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker Troubleshooting 268 e The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off and then back on This often fixes the problem with the scanner Scan was not successful These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to th
93. Y RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY AND EVEN IF LEXMARK OR ITS SUPPLIERS AFFILIATES OR REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD PARTY CLAIM EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED LEGALLY INVALID THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE 4 U S A STATE LAWS This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations may not apply to you 5 LICENSE GRANT Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this License Agreement a Use You may Use one 1 copy of the Software Program The term Use means storing loading installing executing or displaying the Software Program If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for concurrent use you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement with Lexmark You may not separate th
94. acks the print job sequentially Understanding printer menus 185 Menu item Description Sides Duplex Enables duplex printing two sided printing Enables stapling Note Off is the factory default setting Duplex Binding Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the Long Edge page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Short Edge Notes Long Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages Orientation Specifies the orientation of the print job Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Portrait Landscape N up pages side Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper Off This is also referred to as Paper Saver 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up e Off is the factory default setting Notes 6 Up e The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up N up Border Prints a border around each page image when using N up None Note None is the factory default setting Solid N up Ordering Specifies the positioning of multiple page images when using N up Horizontal Notes Reverse Horizontal Roversa Vertical e Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical e Positionin
95. ad the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Otherwise touch Finish the job Placing information on copies Placing the date and time at the top of each page 1 O on O U A W N Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Options Touch Header Footer Pick an area of the page to place the date and time Touch Date Time and then touch Continue Touch Done Touch Copy It Copying 95 Placing an overlay message on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy or Draft To place a message on the copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Options Touch Overlay
96. adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet Notices 301 2YMMOPOONETAI MPO2 TI OYZIOAEI2 ANAITH2EI2 KAI TI AOINE2 2XETIKE2 AIATA El2 TH OAHTIA2 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the EAAnvikh ME THN NAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO NPOION essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espanol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti Kaesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU pohinouetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc
97. al Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment CCO Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower IIl 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje ze v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po
98. aller than 182 x 257 mm 7 x 10 in we recommend 90 g m 24 Ib or heavier paper Note Duplex is supported only for 60 g m 120 g m 16 Ib 32 lb bond paper Curl Curlis the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points however smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a lon
99. an white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures E mailing 106 e Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color Sets the scan type and output for the e mail Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e mail address Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging Custom Job Transmission Log Scan Preview Edge Erase and Darkness settings Advanced Imaging Adjusts Background Removal Contrast Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Mirror Image before you copy the document Custom Job Job Build Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Transmission Log Prints the transmission log or transmission error log Scan Preview Displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Edge Erase Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Darkness Adjusts h
100. anner registratorius A aa tie 201 AONNE SUPPE an E en RS en ae eee 202 COTISOL VIS SUNS Sst cases rts tt ee E A a ose AA 202 Checking the Status OF SUDDINCS urean AE node cauetaa a eet data deitactia a 202 Ordering SUD DIOS osrand E E a a A anaes ti alee 203 RED IACIIIG SUING ranra T E E EE 204 MOVING the prNtE nennen eiai e E a 211 Administrative SUPPOFt cccccccscscscccsccccccccscscccscscscccccccscsscscscscscsceesesess 2 LO Finding advanced networking and administrator infOrmation cccccccssecseccceccesceseesseceeeceeeceeeceeeees 216 Usine the Embedded Web Servel sameinir a a R A A T A oud 216 CHEEIKING CG Vital di playeras E E E a 216 Checkine the device Stat US oedessnccnrnse aaa NE aa 217 SCDE UD emal aler S ia an aE E A E E EER 217 VIEWING TOD OFES crasina a a a a AN iaennetess 217 Adj stine the bDriehtness ofthe dis plavia a T a a 217 Restoring the factory default settings ssseeseeeseessessessserssrssrrrereserssressrvserssressrreeerereseesseesseserereseere 218 Troubleshooting essi iseccsresisecsrccucaes ania a a a a LO SOIVING Dasi PrODIEM S airiran a a a r a E a 219 Understanding printer messages camosci a A E E a ees 220 Cearne TN ae T T ee eR eee 235 Solving DrinNUNEpPrOpleM Soannen E a a E a N 262 SONNE CODY DODIES mainoa iani Ee NAA EEE E E T EGA 265 SOIVINE scanner problem Serea a a a a e i 267 SOVNE aX PLODIEMS arrsa a a ern ore eee ee eee 269 SOVNE OPTION PrODIE S sssr ieme e a 273 S lViNe paper
101. aper jam The printer was sent a scan job but found no original document in the ADF Try one or more of the following Touch Continue if no scan job is active when the message appears This clears the message Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears This cancels the job and clears the message Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately after the last successfully scanned page Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active The job ends at the last successfully scanned page but the job is not canceled Successfully scanned pages go to their destination copy fax e mail or FTP Touch Restart job if job recovery is active and the job is restartable The message clears A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts Troubleshooting 262 Solving printing problems Multiple language PDFs do not print The documents contain unavailable fonts 1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat 2 Click the printer icon The Print dialog appears 3 Select Print as image 4 Click OK Error message about reading USB drive appears Make sure the USB drive is supported For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memo
102. ars 2 On the home screen touch Status Supplies Note If Status Supplies is not on the home screen then print a menu settings page to review the status of the supplies Checking the status of supplies from a network computer Note The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer Maintaining the printer 203 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status The Device Status page appears displaying a summary of supply levels Ordering supplies To order supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web Site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Note All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter or A4 size plain paper Ordering toner cartridges Recommended toner cartridge and part number Part name Part number For printer s High Yield Toner Cartridge X860H21G X860 X862 X864 Ordering a photoconductor kit When Replace Photoconductor message appears order a new photoconductor kit Part name Part number For printer s Photoconductor Kit X860H22G X860 X862 X864 Ordering a maintenance kit When 80 Routine maintenance needed appears
103. atino StempelGaramond Taffy Times TimesNewRoman Univers Zapf Chancery Description Sets the default font size for HTML documents Notes e 12 pt is the factory default setting e Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scales the default font for HTML documents Notes e 100 is the factory default setting e Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Sets the page orientation for HTML documents Note Portrait is the factory default setting Sets the page margin for HTML documents Notes e 19 mm is the factory default setting e Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Understanding printer menus 197 Menu item Description Backgrounds Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Do Not Print Note Print is the factory default setting Print Image menu Menu item Description Auto Fit Selects the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Notes Off e On is the factory default setting e The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images Invert Inverts bi tonal monochrome images On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting e The font size can be increased in 1 point increments e This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scales the image to fit the selected paper size Anchor Top Left Best Fit Anchor Center Fit Height Width e When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Notes
104. ax Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad Touch Options O uu A W N Touch Advanced Options Faxing 117 7 Touch Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server the Delayed Send button will not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue 8 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes If the current time is shown the left arrow is unavailable 9 Touch Done 10 Touch Fax it Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Viewing a fax log 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports 3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Blocking junk faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup U A WwW N Click the Block No Name Fax option This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name 6 Inthe Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to bloc
105. ay background 279 poor transparency quality 287 print irregularities 280 print is too dark 281 print is too light 282 print quality test pages 277 repeating defects 283 skewed print 283 solid black streaks 283 solid white streaks 283 streaked horizontal lines 284 streaked vertical lines 285 312 toner fog or background shading 285 toner rubs off 286 toner specks 286 print troubleshooting error reading USB drive 262 held jobs do not print 263 incorrect characters print 264 incorrect margins 279 jammed page does not reprint 276 job prints from wrong tray 264 job prints on wrong paper 264 job takes longer than expected 263 jobs do not print 262 Large jobs do not collate 264 multiple language PDFs do not print 262 paper curl 280 paper frequently jams 276 tray linking does not work 264 unexpected page breaks occur 265 printer configurations 12 minimum clearances 10 models 12 moving 211 215 selecting a location 10 shipping 215 printer control panel 15 factory defaults restoring 218 printer information where to find 9 printer messages 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 235 298 01 Scanner Missing 235 30 Invalid refill change cartridge 228 31 yy Replace defective or missing cartridge 229 32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device 229 34 Incorrect media check lt input src gt guides 229 34 Short paper 229 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 229 Index 37 Insufficient memory for F
106. ble for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web at www lexmark com support Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Notices 303 Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or
107. business graphics and brochures When should use Photo Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or mode newspaper Understanding printer menus Understanding printer menus Menus list To access the menus touch on the home screen Paper Menu Reports Network Ports Default Source Menu Settings Page Active NIC Paper Size Type Device Statistics Standard Network2 Configure MP Network Setup Page SMTP Setup Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Custom Bin Names Universal Setup Bin Setup 1 Only appears if a wireless card is installed Network lt x gt Setup Page Wireless Setup Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List NetWare Setup Page Print Fonts Print Directory Print Demo Asset Report Standard USB Depending on the printer setup this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network lt x gt Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Disc Wiping Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Help Print all guides Copy guide E mail guide Fax guide FTP guide Information guide Print Defects guide Supplies Guide 131 Understanding printer
108. cannot distinguish between B5 and Executive size paper when both sizes are loaded in the trays From the Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect Load either B5 or Executive size paper in the paper trays but not both m Paper and specialty media guidelines 7 Optional input trays Paper size Dimensions Optional Optional 2 000 sheet high 2 000 sheet dual Capacity feeder input trays 210 x 297 mm J 8 27 x 11 7 in A51 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in Duplex unit 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 in 297 x 420 mm 11 7 x 16 5 in Statement 2 139 7 x 215 9 mm 5 5 x 8 5 in Oficio M xico 215 9 x 340 4 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in JIS BS 182 x 257 mm V 7 17 x 10 1 in 257 x 364mm 10 1 x 14 3 in Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm vi 8 5 x 11 in Tabloid 279 4 x 431 8 mm 11 x 17 in Legal 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Executive 184 2 x 266 7 mm V 7 25 x 10 5 in 215 9 x 330 2 mm 8 5 x 13 in The printer trays cannot distinguish between A5 and statement size paper when both sizes are loaded in the printer trays From the Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect Load either A5 or statement size paper in the paper trays but not both This paper size is supported only when the source is non size sensing or when size sensing is disabled 3 The printer trays cannot distinguish between B5 and Executive size paper when both sizes are loaded in the trays From t
109. caster base e 2 000 sheet dual trays and high capacity feeder e Standard or optional 500 sheet trays Duplex unit e Printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to move it safely For more information on installing a printer stand caster base or 2 000 sheet tray see the setup documentation that came with the option Additional printer setup 37 Installing optional trays The printer supports the following optional input sources e 2 Tray Module two 500 sheet trays e 2 000 sheet dual input trays e 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder e Duplex unit A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 55kg 121 Ibs and requires at least four persons or a properly rated mechanical handling system to move it safely AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer 1 Unpack the optional tray and remove all packing material 2 Place the tray in the location chosen for the printer Note If you are installing more than one optional tray the 2 000 sheet dual input trays must always be installed as the first optional t
110. cels the job and clears the message e Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page e Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately after the last successfully scanned page Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active The job ends at the last successfully scanned page but the job is not canceled Successfully scanned pages go to their destination copy fax e mail or FTP Touch Restart job if job recovery is active The message clears A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared Replace the original documents in the scanner to restart the scan job Try one or more of the following e Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears This cancels the job and clears the message Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page e Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately after the last successfully scanned page Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam r
111. ces Content affects the quality and size of your scan Text Emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background e Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures e Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color Sets the scan type and output for the fax Color documents can be scanned and sent to a fax destination Note Color is not available when Fax is in Fax Server Mode Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax Faxing 119 Resolution This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax If you are faxing a photo a drawing with fine lines or a document with very small text increase the Resolution setting This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output e Standard Suitable for most documents e Fine Recommended for documents with small print e Super fine Recommended for original documents with fine detail e Ultra fine Recommended for documents with pictu
112. cial mesmo de estacoes do mesmo tipo e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario Res ANATEL 282 2001 Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Notices 299 Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions Suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d i
113. cifies how the images will be sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Specifies whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Specifies a paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specifies an output bin for the printed e mail log Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 177 Menu item Description Allow Save as Shortcut Background Removal 4 to 4 Auto Center Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image Lets you save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes e Offis the factory default setting e Wh
114. contact the paper supplier Paper and specialty media guidelines 69 Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality e For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24 C 65 to 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 e Store paper in cartons when possible on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor e Store individual packages on a flat surface e Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support Note For an unlisted paper size configure a Universal Paper Size Supported paper sizes Measurements apply to simplex one sided printing only For duplex two sided printing the minimum size is 139 7 x 210 mm 5 50 x 8 27 in Basic input trays Paper size Dimensions Standard 500 sheet trays Tray 1 Multipurpose feeder and Tray 2 SY a Oficio M xico 215 9 x 340 4 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in The printer trays cannot distinguish between A5 and statement size paper when both sizes are loaded in the printer trays From the Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect Load either A5 or statement size paper in the paper trays but not both
115. contains transparencies or touch Manual Feeder and then place transparencies in the multipurpose feeder Touch the desired size of the transparencies and then touch Continue Touch the arrows until Transparency appears Touch Transparency and then touch Continue Touch Copy It Copying 89 Copying to letterhead 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document U A W N Touch Copy to and then touch Manual Feeder and place letterhead face down top edge first in the multipurpose feeder Touch the desired size of the letterhead and then touch Continue Touch the arrows until Letterhead appears Touch Letterhead and then touch Continue O Oo N OO Touch Copy It Customizing copy settings Copying from one size to another 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document i
116. cseusscusceuesseouscsesstensensessonseessensss 57 Contents 3 Loading BS Of Executive paper SIZES erii a a Taa 58 Loading the 2000 sheet high capacity fECCES ceeccesccceecccscceseceecceeseceeecceeeceesecseecceneeesectegeeeeneenseeees 58 Loading the 2 000 sheet dual input CLAYS ceanisseenn E E E eee ates 60 L adine the multipurpose Teede uoronrcsinnmnradan naa aaa ai 62 Loading letter or A4 size paper in the short edge orientation esssssssessereerrerresrerrrrerresrrrersresrerrrsreses 64 LIKING and CMMMKING TRAV Sensuais a a E E A a evs 64 Paper and specialty media guidelines sssssessessessoesessossessosssesesseesessses 07 Paper euideliNE Scaune E N E E E E E OT OEE A 67 SONNE DAD CL arar enina E E E sc a ca Pade ene NE 69 Supported paper sizes types and WEIGHTHS cccccecceecceeceececececeeseeeceeeceseseueeeeceueeesteneeeeseueeeseeesegees 69 PANNE TAOCUMEN orani E EE T a E 74 Printinge on specialty Medid carraseoner ua a a ete aa a a a i 75 Printing conidentakand Other heldjJoODS rustre ianen aE E EE ae Aven esneeeee 79 PEI EINE roma Nas RAAVE ern e a E a r O 80 PRALINE INTORNVALION Dde ES aoun a i E a O E e 82 canceling AiDriMt OO aisetyscsdacsteeceaeretes att wainiecd a aana a aan a a aae 82 SUPPOred HNS NINE Teatre Snia a A teaeeoaan ae atnaneoanaauseee ates 84 Adjusting toner darkNe S Sannn a NN 86 CODVIN E crisan O Oa A E E a ROT Makine CODIE esaea I PR re eT a eee eee 87 OVS INOS oars acr
117. cted to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected toa telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ HTXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupte
118. ction problems Learning about the printer 10 What are you looking for Find it here Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software program or application and then click Help Click 2 to view context sensitive information Notes e The Help installs automatically with the printer software e The printer software is located in the printer Program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Latest supplemental information updates and technical support Lexmark Support Web site Documentation http support lexmark com Note Select your country or region and then select your product to view the appropriate support site Driver downloads Live chat support Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web Telephone support site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer E mail support Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact support so they may serve you faster e Machine Type number e Serial number e Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region e Inthe US See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or at http support lexmark com e In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that ca
119. ctory default setting No pages will be collated e The On setting stacks the print job sequentially Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies menu setting Separator Sheets Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted None Notes Between Copies Between Jobs e None is the factory default setting Between Pages e Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collation is set to On If Collation is set to Off a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages ina document for notes Separator Source Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Tray lt x gt Notes Multi Purpose Feeder Envelope Feeder e Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting e From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for Multi Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting N up pages side Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper Off 2 Up 3 Up e Off is the factory default setting Notes 4 Up e The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up N up Ordering Specifies the positionin
120. d fax jobs Understanding printer menus Menu item Cancel Faxes Allow Don t Allow Caller ID FSK DTMF Fax number masking Off From left From right Digits to mask 0 58 Fax Send Settings Resolution Standard Fine Super Fine Ultra Fine Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal 166 Description Specifies whether the printer may cancel fax jobs Note If Cancel Faxes is not enabled it will not appear as an option Specifies type of caller ID being used Note FSK is the factory default setting Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Note The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to mask setting Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number Description Specifies quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives greater print quality but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes Note Standard is the factory default setting Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Understanding printer menus 167 Menu item Description Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge Content Text Text Photo
121. d login attempts before users are L i ogin timeout locked out Settings range from 1 50 3 attempts is the factory default setting Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long a user is locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 0 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting O indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time Login timeout specifies how long the remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 300 seconds is the factory default setting Confidential Print menu Description Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Off 2 10 Notes e Off is the default setting e This menu item appears only if a printer hard disk is installed e Once a limit is reached the jobs for that user name and that PIN are deleted Understanding printer menus Menu item Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Disk Wiping menu Menu item 154 Description Limits the amount of time a confidential job stays in the printer before it is deleted Notes e Off is the default setting e If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential jobs reside on the
122. d service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally
123. ded differs from the type that was previously loaded in the tray then change the Paper Type setting for the tray Loading A5 or Statement paper sizes The printer trays cannot distinguish between A5 148 x 210 mm and Statement size 139 7 x 215 9 mm paper when both sizes are loaded in the printer trays From the Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect Load either A5 or Statement size paper in the paper trays but not both Note The multipurpose feeder does not use auto size sensing and can support both A5 and Statement size print jobs The Size Sensing setting does not affect the multipurpose feeder settings a Load either A5 or Statement size paper in a paper tray Turn the printer off Hold down and 8 while turning the printer on Aa WwW N Release the buttons when the screen with the Progress Bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then Configuration Menu appears Touch the up or down arrow button until Size Sensing appears Touch Size Sensing Select Statement A5 Touch the left or right arrow button until the paper size you want appears O on Q A Touch Submit 10 Touch Exit Configuration Menu Loading paper and specialty media 58 Loading B5 or Executive paper sizes The printer trays cannot distinguish between B5 and Executive size paper when both sizes are loaded in the trays From the Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect
124. der to print from that source Recycled Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus Paper Card Stock Transparency Rough Cotton e The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or Labels multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Bond Envelope Notes e Paper is the factory default setting Custom Names menu Menu item Definition Custom Name lt x gt Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replaces a Custom Type lt none gt lt x gt name in the printer menus Understanding printer menus 140 Custom Scan Sizes menu Menu item Description Custom Scan Size lt x gt Specifies a custom scan size name and options This name replaces a Custom Scan Size Name Scan Size lt x gt name inthe printer menus Width Notes 3 14 17 inches 76 360 mm Height 3 14 17 inches 76 360 mm Orientation e 8 5 Inches is the US factory default setting for Width 216 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width 14 Inches is the US factory default setting for Height 356 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height Landscape Portrait Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side 2 scans per side User Default is the factory default setting for ADF Pick Roller Force On ADF Pick Roller Force User Default 30 40 50 60 70 80 Custom Bin Na
125. dge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Improving fax quality When should I use Text Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax and preserving images mode copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts carbon copy forms and documents that contain only text or fine line art When should I use Use Text Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a mixture of text and Text Photo mode graphics Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures Faxing 120 When should I use Photo Use E mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or mode newspaper Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup Click Holding Faxes O wu A W N Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box Note This may not be applicable in some cases 7 From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of t
126. e Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM format lt input date time gt Time Zone Note GMT is the factory default setting lt list of time zones gt Understanding printer menus 156 Description Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting Set up your time zone Enables Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network Note On is the factory default setting Settings menu General Settings menu Menu item Description Display Language Sets the language of the text appearing on the display English Note All languages may not be available for all printers Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Understanding printer menus Menu item Eco Mode Off Energy Energy Paper Paper Run Initial setup Yes No Paper Sizes US Metric Output Lighting Normal Standby Mode Bright e Dim Off Power Saver e Bright e Dim Off 157 Description Minimizes the use of energy paper or specialty media Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off resets the printer to its factory default settings e The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not e The Paper setting
127. e aa a a a aa a igi ieu a eles eae e 88 Copying on Specialty Medid msrreianrin osc acces anor cape NT A cece eee 88 CUSTOM ZINE COD VSS USS iar E E N A lodsabcaduta sions autesn nagobodetuspeveeekes 89 Placine information On CODI Sose E NOEN ESCE AEE TEOT E E 94 canceling a CODY 0 Drissaan a AT E a a a a aaa 95 Understanding the copy screens and OptionS eeeseseseesseessesssersressersrrrerrsrrssrssresserssreseereresressresrreserseene 96 MIST OVINE CODY GU renra A A 98 SUCU E E E A A A E E LOO Gettine reddy toe mMalliossssaa a E EA a r as 100 Ceatineane Malk Shornt CU Esinaine n a a a a 101 Baal IS a document sruse n T A T aa T 102 C stomizine e mail setne orerar R EES 103 Contents A ESMmalline Color COCUMENES assess descaisuanaideecansswancnaiahosterainad A a 104 canceling ane Va ie waketeannccreceesuncturataenedad pce wach eae ket et odie ld ota et hav a a a a Dace tepaese 104 WHGEr STAN CIM r OO UIOIMNS es sec cssccceste ss E T 104 PINE a wiateniactos oatee scan vaieca sito a aa a aaa LOT GETLING PRIMER TAY COs AN so seiccass esc ov scwan cate itvceoscnas ae a tases ees tea 107 SY et ALG UA FAR ec eee eR Ere ore ee ne eA ENP 9 en en ere 112 Creatine SO UCU Ga iio A E E AO 113 Usine shortcuts and the address DOOK issiirincieianriron an a AA E A 115 CUSTOMIZING Tax SC UNOS a E E a a a T 116 Cancelihe anm OUTIO INS TaK aerar a a E 117 Understandine Tax OPUONS marsin a ai a e ie NEE T 118 Mporovine fax CU AN CY reseca a ET
128. e after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electrical components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors Note A 2 Phillips screwdriver is needed to install an internal print server or port interface card An internal print server allows connection from the printer to the local area network LAN An optional port interface card expands the ways the printer can connect to a computer or external print server 1 Access the system board 2 Unpack the internal print server or port interface card 3 Remove the metal plate on the system board tray that covers the connector slot and save the metal plate Laue e000 y o0 Va 4 Align the connector on the internal print server or port interface card with the connector on the system board Note The cable connectors on the side of the optional card must fit through the opening in the faceplate Additional printer setup 33 a N A o W So000 ye 5 Push the internal print server or port interface card firmly into the card connector
129. e components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer You agree that you will not Use the Software Program in whole or in part in any manner that has the effect of overriding modifying eliminating obscuring altering or de emphasizing the visual appearance of any trademark trade name trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens normally generated by or as a result of the Software Program b Copying You may make one 1 copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup archiving or installation provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program s proprietary notices You may not copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network c Reservation of Rights The Software Program including all fonts is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark International Inc and or its suppliers Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this License Agreement d Freeware Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this License Agreement all or any portion of the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties Freeware is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such Freeware whether in the form of a discrete agreement shrink wrap license or electronic license terms at the time of download Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirel
130. e computer and the printer AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM Turn off and then restart the computer Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING Close all programs not being used THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH Select a lower scan resolution Poor scanned image quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 201 ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory Troubleshooting 269 CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Partial document or photo scans These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel
131. e if you are using a wireless router Select the type of security you use to protect your wireless network Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network Click Submit Open the AirPort application on your computer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a From the Apple menu choose System Preferences b Click Network c Click AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier a From the Finder desktop click Go gt Applications b From the Applications folder double click Internet Connect c From the toolbar click AirPort From the Network pop up menu select your wireless network Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly To print to a network printer each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description PPD file and create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility 1 Install a PPD file on the computer Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive Double click the installer package for the printer From the Welcome screen click Continue Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file Click Continue after viewing the license agreement and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement Select a Destination and then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install gt AQ O QA a o Type the user password and then click OK All necessary software is installed on the computer i C
132. e mail 104 105 106 fax 118 119 FTP 124 125 scan to computer 128 129 130 ordering cleaning kit 204 maintenance kit 203 photoconductors 203 staple cartridges 204 ordering supplies toner cartridge 203 output file type changing 103 p paper A5 57 B5 58 characteristics 67 Executive 58 finishing features 84 letterhead 68 preprinted forms 68 recycled 23 selecting 68 Setting size 54 setting type 54 Statement 57 storing 69 unacceptable 68 Universal Paper Size 140 Universal size setting 54 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 276 paper jams avoiding 235 paper jams clearing 200 201 238 202 239 203 240 230 240 231 240 24x 246 250 250 280 281 250 282 250 283 253 284 256 285 286 256 287 288 256 290 294 259 293 261 Paper Loading menu 138 Paper Size Type menu 132 paper sizes supported 69 Paper Texture menu 136 paper type custom 65 paper types supported by printer 72 where to load 72 paper weights supported by printer 72 PCL Emul menu 193 PDF menu 192 photoconductor replacing 206 photoconductors ordering 203 photos copying 88 port interface card 32 port settings configuring 50 PostScript menu 193 Power Saver adjusting 23 print job canceling from Macintosh 83 canceling from Windows 83 print quality cleaning the scanner glass 201 print quality test pages printing 82 print quality troubleshooting blank pages 277 clipped images 278 ghost images 278 gr
133. e message appears again contact your system support person Disk Full Scan Job Canceled The scan job canceled or stopped due to insufficient printer hard disk space Touch Continue to clear the message Fax memory full There is not enough memory to send the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator The printer is in Fax Server mode but the Fax Server setup has not been completed Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up The Fax Station Name has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Number not set up The Fax Station Number has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Troubleshooting 224 Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Insert Tray lt x gt Insert the specified tray into the printer Load lt src gt with lt x gt lt src gt is a tray or feeder and lt x g
134. e of the paper onto which you are copying To reduce or enlarge a copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Scale area touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Under Content touch the left or right arrow to select what you are copying e Text Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art e Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Copying 92 e Photograph Used when the original document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print e Printed Image Used when copying ha
135. ears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding e mail options Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e mail e Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The e mail screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper Sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail E mailing 105 Orientation This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation Binding This option tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side E mail Subject This option lets you enter a subject line for your e mail You can enter up to 255 characters E mail File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name E mail Message This option lets y
136. eb browsers and graphics programs XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photo Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file Text Emphasize sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP site computer e mail address or the printer Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change the following settings Advanced Imaging Adjusts Background Removal Contrast Shadow Detail and Mirror Image before you scan the document Custom Job Job Build Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Transmission Log Prints the transmission log or transmission error log Scan Preview Displays the first page of an image bef
137. ecifies the orientation of the scanned image Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files Fora multiple page scan to fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Enables analog fax receive Note Off is the factory default setting Description Specifies e mail server information Note The message box has a limitation of 512 characters Understanding printer menus Menu item E mail Server Setup Send me a copy Never appears On by default Off by default Always On E mail Server Setup Max e mail size 0O 65535 KB E mail Server Setup Size Error Message E mail Server Setup Limit destinations E mail Server Setup Web Link Setup Server Login Password Path Base file name Web Link Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version 1 2 1 6 Content Text Photo Photograph Text 174 Description Sends a copy of the e mail back to the creator of the e mail Specifies the maximum e mail size in kilobytes Note E mail above the specified size is not sent Sends a message when an e mail
138. ecovery is active The job ends at the last successfully scanned page but the job is not canceled Successfully scanned pages go to their destination copy fax e mail or FTP e Touch Restart job if job recovery is active The message clears A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts Restore Held Jobs Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk e Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored Troubleshooting 228 Replace jammed originals if restarting job One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared Replace the original documents in the scanner to restart the scan job Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears This cancels the job and clears the message e Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page e Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately after the last successfully scanned page Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active The job ends at the last successfully scanned page but the job is not canceled Successfully scanned pages go to their destination copy fax e mail or FTP e Touch Restart job if job
139. ect only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s a l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement limit mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cing Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l
140. ed e This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers Shortcut List Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Fax Call Log Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Emalshonents Pim areprtconannghfonaton abour emalshoneus rushers Pinte repr contaria formaton about taxstorians NetWare Setup Page Prints a report containing NetWare specific information about the network settings Note This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server installed Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Print Directory Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes e Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 e The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed correctly and working properly Understanding printer menus 144 Menu item Description Asset Report Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Description Active NIC Notes Auto l e Auto is the factory default setting lt list of available ne
141. ed Avoid exposure to laser beam Perigo Emiss o invis vel de laser quando os cartuchos s o removidos e a trava aberta Evite exposi o ao feixe Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima Pozor Nebezpe v skytu neviditeln ho laserov ho z en p i odstran n kazet a odblokov n pojistky Nevystavujte se paprsk m Fare Usynlig laserstraling nar tonerkassetterne fjernes og aflasning oph ves Undg at komme i kontakt med str len Pas op Onzichtbare laserstraling als cartridges worden verwijderd en vergrendeling open is Voorkom blootstelling aan de stralen Danger Radiations invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser Vaara N kym t nt lasers teily on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt s teelle altistumista Gefahr Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden K v uvo Adpatn akt vo o a A iep tav APaIpOUVTAl oi Kag Te KA e ou eTepWwveTal n evSaogaAela ATTOMUYETE THV EKBEGN OTN SEU TWV aKT VWV Figyelem A kazett k kiv telekor l thatatlan l zersug rz s l phet fel ha a biztons gi kapcsol nem m k dik Ker lj k el a l zersugarat Pericolo Emissione di radiazioni laser durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l espos
142. ed as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n2 de r f rence Lexmark 14B5109 ou 80D1877 devant tre install sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz Fur dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zahlzeichenubertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 14B5109 oder 80D1877 fur jede Leitung installiert werden Uber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating t
143. ed and the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying to mixed paper sizes The printer has two paper trays one tray loaded with letter size paper and the other with legal size paper A document that contains letter and legal size pages needs to be copied 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then touch Auto Size Sense Touch Copy to and then touch Auto Size Match O un A W N Touch Copy It The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Example 2 Copying to a single paper size The printer has one paper tray loaded with letter size paper A document that contains letter and legal size pages needs to be copied 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings i
144. edia such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Scanning to a computer or flash drive 128 10 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 11 Press P and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad or touch Held Jobs on the home screen and then touch Profiles 12 After you enter the shortcut number the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified If you touched Profiles on the home screen then locate your shortcut on the list 13 Touch Finish the Job 14 Return to the computer to view the file The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer 4 Touch Scan to USB drive 5 Select the size and file that you want to scan 6 Touch Scan It Understanding scan profile options Quick Setup This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings You can select one of these settings Custom Photo Color JPEG T
145. el check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Incorrect characters print MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS NOT IN HEX TRACE MODE If Ready Hex appears on the display then you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode Tray linking does not work These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER e Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked e Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray Use THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND Paper TYPE SETTINGS e Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray e f necessary adjust the settings from the Paper Size Type menu Note The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Large jobs do not collate These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON From the Finishing menu or Print Properties set Collate to On Note Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Reduce the complexity of the print job by elimina
146. en set to Off the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the E mail Destination screen Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Lets you automatically center the copy on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Enables the use of the cc and bcc fields Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 178 FTP Settings menu Menu item Description Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version 1 2 1 6 Content Text Photo Photograph Text Resolution 75 150 200 300 400 600
147. entation is important when printing on letterhead Use the following sections to determine which direction to load the letterhead Source or process Print side Standard 500 sheet trays Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup Optional 500 sheet trays Optional 2 000 sheet dual input trays Optional 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown Multipurpose tray simplex printing Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown Duplex two sided printing from trays Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown Sheet placement is faceup in the 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder and the multipurpose feeder Orienting the paper for long or short edge printing Paper trays Short edge orientation Long edge orientation With finisher With finisher Printing 77 Multipurpose tray Simplex one sided printing Duplex two sided printing Za Zz rae ae AA AA Tips on using transparencies Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities Feed transparencies from the standard tray or the multipurpose feeder From the Paper menu set the Paper Type to Transparency Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 230 C 446 F without melting discoloring offsetting or releasing hazardous emission
148. er Write the last six digits of the MAC address in the space provided below MAC address ese 2 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the power on Additional printer setup 45 Enter the printer information 1 Access the AirPort options In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a From the Apple menu choose System Preferences b Click Network c Click AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier a From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications b From the Applications folder double click Internet Connect c From the toolbar click AirPort 2 From the Network pop up menu select print server xxxxxx where the x s are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet 3 Open the Safari browser 4 From the Bookmarks drop down menu select Show 5 Under Collections select Bonjour or Rendezvous and then double click the printer name Note The application is referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10 3 but is now called Bonjour by Apple Computer 6 From the main page of the Embedded Web Server navigate to the page where the wireless settings information is stored Additional printer setup 46 Configure the printer for wireless access 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Type the name of your network SSID in the appropriate field Select Infrastructure as your Network Mod
149. er custom text 163 Description Specifies header footer information for the bottom left of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specifies header footer information for the bottom middle of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specifies header footer information for the bottom right of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus Menu item Overlay Off Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Custom Overlay Allow priority copies Background Removal 4 to 4 Fax Settings menu 164 Description Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies custom overlay text Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line Understanding printe
150. erstanding printer menus 159 Menu item Description Timeouts Wait Timeout Disabled 15 65535 sec Timeouts Job Hold Timeout 5 255 sec Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 sec Print Recovery Jam Recovery Auto Print Recovery Page Protect On Factory Defaults Do Not Restore Restore Now Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job Notes e 40 seconds is the factory default setting e Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL or PPDS emulation print jobs Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue Notes e 30 seconds is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when they are not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes e Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks e On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages e Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Lets the pri
151. es 140 Custom Types 139 Default Source 132 diagram of 131 Disk Wiping 154 E mail Settings 173 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 164 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 172 Finishing 188 Flash Drive 181 FTP Settings 178 General Settings 156 Help 198 HTML 196 Image 197 IPv6 149 LexLink 151 Miscellaneous 153 NetWare 151 Network lt x gt 144 Network Card 147 Network Reports 147 Paper Loading 138 Paper Size Type 132 Paper Texture 136 PCL Emul 193 PDF 192 PostScript 193 311 Quality 190 Reports 142 Security Audit Log 155 Set Date Time 155 Setup 186 SMTP Setup menu 151 Standard Network 144 Standard USB 146 Substitute Size 136 TCP IP 148 Universal Setup 140 Utilities 191 Wireless 150 XPS 197 Miscellaneous menu 153 moving the printer 211 215 multiple pages on one sheet 93 multipurpose feeder loading 62 N NetWare menu 151 Network lt x gt menu 144 Network Card menu 147 Network Reports menu 147 network setup page 40 Networking Guide 216 noise reducing 24 noise emission levels 291 notices 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 O options 2 000 sheet dual input trays 37 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 37 500 sheet trays 37 duplex unit 37 fax card 27 firmware card 31 firmware cards 27 flash memory card 31 hard disk 33 internal 27 internal print server 32 memory card 29 memory cards 27 networking 27 port interface card 32 Index ports 27 options touch screen copy 96 97
152. es until prompted to do so by the setup software e SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name e Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc e Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select e Security Method There are three basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key or WPA or WPA2 passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network using the Advanced method then you may need the following e Authentication type e Inner authentication type e 802 1X username and password e Certificates Note For more information on configuring 802 1X security see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD
153. esolution text against a clean white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Photo Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color This option tells the printer the color of the original documents You can select Gray BW Black and White or Color Original Size This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Orientation This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Scanning to a computer or flash drive 130 Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases t
154. etting Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes e Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu item applies to all scan functions Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Understanding printer menus 180 Menu item Description Transmission Log Specifies whether the transmission log prints Print log Note Print log is the factory default setting Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Specifies a paper source for FTP logs Tray lt x gt Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Manual Feeder Manual
155. etwork setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup 5 Enter the appropriate information into the boxes Scanning to an FTP address 124 6 Enter a shortcut number 7 Click Add Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen On the home screen touch FTP Type the address of the FTP site Touch Save as Shortcut Enter a name for the shortcut Touch Enter O uu fF W N rPe Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Touch Send It to start the scan or touch to return to the home screen Understanding FTP options Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy e Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The FTP screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
156. ew some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer the network and supplies To view reports from a network printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Adjusting the brightness of the display If you are having trouble reading your display the LCD brightness can be adjusted through the Settings menu 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch F9 Administrative support 218 O uu FEF W Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Screen Brightness appears Touch the arrows to increase or decrease the brightness Brightness settings can be adjusted from 20 100 100 is the factory default setting Touch Submit Touch Restoring the factory default settings If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before you restore the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 39 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default setting Exceptions include the display language custom sizes a
157. ext BW PDF Photo Color TIFF Text BW TIFF Text Photo BW PDF Text Photo Color PDF To customize the scan job settings from the Quick Setup menu select Custom Then change the scan settings as needed Format Type This option sets the output PDF JPEG TIFF SECURE PDF or XPS for the scanned image e PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs Scanning to a computer or flash drive 129 e TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG e Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Compression This option sets the format Zlib JPEG or None used to compress the scanned output file Default Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photo Content affects the quality and size of your scanned file Text Emphasizes sharp black high r
158. eyes alae eeceaaee 119 Holding and TOW Aline Taxe Siaran daca sid facts aa senee E O a E 120 Scanning to an FTP addressS seessessessesssesssssessoessescoessessessesssessessesseesse L22 SCaNMING to an FIP addres Seea a a a A E 122 CeeS AOE a a a a a r esas vacua dence tdeedtouenteszeueiedt 123 Understanding FIP OPDUONSaciseniiirin e n n AE E N EEA 124 MOr OVINE FIP OUAI Vensi E T aes aukeceum a asateaeaeeneaaeeee 126 Scanning to a computer or flash Crive ccccscscscscscscscscscscscecscececcscccseseee L27 SCaMMINE VO a COMPUTE as a a a r N 127 SC AFA Oa aS IV CIV aa a a a a iat E E 128 Understanding scan profile option Suresinin as aa E EE a 128 IVA OV SS Cal guall yina T T 130 Understanding printer Me NnuS ccccscscsccccscscscsccccccccscsccccscecscesessecscscesee LOL Menus hs etree a a a aaa a a 131 PaDErI C Mna E E a ENAN N 132 REDO MENUno eeen EE A NEE EO AA OTDI NE DEEA EEEE AOA AEAN 142 Network 8X0 g tua lt 1 p10 Ree mene ee nen nO RNS naa e a A arene eee ert eer 144 SCURVY TUM care wishes adie E E E E 153 SO GUIS se Ul AE TE A A E E A E E TE T EE E O P A E T E 156 BOOKICEAGIUSTINIONTS ME NUanco aa a a e a e aa aiei 197 Help Men 6 Pee na ocr ES E T T ee ee eee 198 Contents 5 Maintaining the printer sessessssescscesceccescscesceceecsescesceceececcessecsesecseseeseee 200 Cleaning the xterior OF LMG PAME aucider na ea A r a 200 Cleaning the scanner Ol ASS enrserensr iie E E 201 Adj stine sc
159. f Preprinted Loading Duplex Off Colored Loading Duplex Off Light Loading Duplex Off Heavy Loading Duplex Off Rough Loading Duplex Off Notes Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Card Stock as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Recycled as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Bond as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Colored as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Light as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Heavy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs
160. f the option is not listed then reinstall it MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS AVAILABLE IN THE PRINTER DRIVER It may be necessary to manually add the option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 41 MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED From the program you are using select the option Mac OS 9 users should make sure the printer is set up in the Chooser Troubleshooting 274 Paper tray problems Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY 1 Open the paper tray 2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds 3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper 4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on IMIAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray then it may not be properly installed Reinstall the paper tray For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray or go to http support lexmark com to view the paper tray instruction sheet Solving 2 000 sheet drawer problems Try one or more of the following THE ELEVATOR TRAY IS NOT WORKING PROPERLY e Make sure the printer is properly connected to the 2 000 sheet drawer e Make sure the printer is turned o
161. fault setting for Device Initiated E mail and User Initiated E mail Understanding printer menus 153 Security menu Miscellaneous menu Menu item Description Panel Logins Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control Login failures panel before all users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time a _ e Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are H Ue locked out Settings range from 1 50 3 attempts is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout ae Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 0 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting O indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 300 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Logins Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from a computer before Login failures all remote users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time otis e Login failures specifies the number of faile
162. for all jobs that specify Rough as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting e Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh e If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided jobs Understanding printer menus 139 Menu item Description Custom lt x gt Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Custom lt x gt as the paper type Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Custom lt x gt Loading is available only if the custom type is supported Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh e If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided jobs Custom Types menu Menu item Description Custom Type lt x gt Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Cus tom Paper Type lt x gt name or a user defined Custom Name created from the Embedded Card Stock Web Server or MarkVision Professional Transparency Notes Rough Cotton Labels Bond Envelope e Paper is the factory default setting e The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in or
163. for an optional flash memory or firmware card Only one of each may be installed but the connectors are interchangeable A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board 1 ai Plastic pins p22 Metal pins 4 Push the card firmly into place Additional printer setup 32 Notes e The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board Be careful not to damage the connectors 5 Reattach the system board cover Installing an internal print server or port interface card AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometim
164. found at http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 52369 Notices 307 2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology You may find the terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 83288 ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE Contains Flash Flash Lite and or Reader technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated This Product contains Adobe Flash player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright 1995 2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC All rights reserved Adobe Reader and Flash are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Index Index Numerics 1 150 sheet tray loading 60 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 235 2 000 sheet dual input trays installing 37 loading 60 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder installing 37 2000 sheet high capacity feeder loading 58 298 01 Scanner Missing 235 30 Invalid refill change cartridge 228 31 yy Replace defective or missing cartridge 229 32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device 229 34 Incorrect media check lt input src gt guides 229 34 Short paper 229 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 229 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment Operation 230 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 229 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 230 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 230 38 Memory full 230 3
165. g depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation Separator Sheets Places a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs based on the value selected None Note None is the factory default setting Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Understanding printer menus 186 Menu item Description Separator Source Specifies a paper source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Envelope Feeder Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Print Settings Setup menu Menu item Description Printer Language Sets the default printer language PCL Emulation PS Emulation Notes e PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs e PCL is the factory default printer language e Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Job Waiting Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require unavailable printer options or custom settings They are stored ina separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information and or options are obtained the stored jobs print Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only if a non Read Only printer hard
166. g of multiple page images when using N up pages sides Horizontal Notes Reverse Horizontal Reverse Verica e Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical e Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of a multiple page sheet Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and Landscape landscape Portrait Understanding printer menus Menu item N up Border None Solid Staple Job On Offset Pages Off Between Jobs Between Copies Quality menu Print Resolution 300 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi 1200 Image Q 2400 Image Q Pixel Boost Off Fonts Horizontally Vertically Both Directions Toner Darkness 1 10 190 Description Prints a border around each page image when using N up pages sides Note None is the factory default setting Specifies whether print jobs are stapled Notes e This menu item is available only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed e Off is the factory default setting Print jobs are not stapled Envelopes are not stapled Stacks copies or print jobs into staggered sets in an output bin Notes e This menu item appears only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed e Off is the factory default setting No pages are offset during the print job Between Jobs offsets each print job Between Copies offsets each copy
167. g the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Understanding printer menus 145 Menu item Description Network Buffer Sets the size of the network input buffer Auto 3K to lt maximum size allowed gt Notes Auto is the factory default setting The value can be changed in 1 K increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Job Buffering Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing This menu appears only if a formatted disk is installed Notes Off is the factory default setting The On value buffers jobs on the printer hard disk This menu selection appears only when a formatted disk is installed and is not defective The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Auto Notes e Auto is the factory default set
168. g the way one of our knowledgeable support representatives will be delighted to help you get back on track fast And if you find something we could do better please let us know After all you are the reason we do what we do and your suggestions help us do it better Finding information about the printer Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Connecting the printer Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide The User s Guide is available on the e Selecting and storing paper and specialty media Software and Documentation CD For updates check our Web site at Loading paper http support lexmark com Configuring printer settings Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software Configuring the printer on a network depending on your printer model Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Instructions for Networking Guide Open the Software and Documentation CD and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder From the list of publications click the Networking Guide link e Installing the printer using Guided or Advanced wireless setup e Connecting the printer to an Ethernet or a wireless network e Troubleshooting printer conne
169. g to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycling By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers In 1998 Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non recycled paper However no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper 20 100 post consumer waste and a variety of test paper from around the world using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today s recycled office papers but generally the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper e Low moisture content 4 5 e Suitable smoothness 100 200 Sheffield units or 140 350 Bendtsen units European Note Some much smoothe
170. ger conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 to 135 g m2 16 to 36 lb bond paper grain long paper is recommended For papers heavier than 135 g m grain short is recommended Paper and specialty media guidelines 68 Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Unacceptable paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer e Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers carbonless copy paper CCP or no carbon required NCR paper e Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer e Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser e Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise print location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms e Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers the
171. h of Kentucky United States of America No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply The UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software Program has been developed entirely at private expense Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program is as set forth in this Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252 227 7014 and in similar FAR provisions or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Lexmark its affiliates and agents may collect and use information you provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by you Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to provide such services EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You may not a acquire ship transfer or reexport directly or indirectly the Software Program or any direct product therefrom in violation of any applicable export laws or b permit the Software Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws including without limitation nuclear chemical or biological weapons proliferation AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY You and Lexmark agree to form this License Agreement electronically This means that when you click the Agree or Yes button on this page or use this product you ac
172. hat has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default source Troubleshooting 225 e Cancel the current job Load lt input src gt with lt size gt Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default source Cancel the current job Load manual feeder with lt x gt lt x gt IS a paper type or size Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default source Cancel the current job Load Manual Feeder with lt Custom Type Name gt Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type a
173. hat you want the printer to hold the job in memory until you start the job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs Note Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Confidential When you send a Confidential print job to the printer you must create a PIN from the computer The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 The job is held in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel and choose to print or delete the job Verify When you send a Verify print job the printer prints one copy and holds the remaining copies in printer memory Verify lets you examine the first copy to see if itis satisfactory before printing the remaining copies Once all copies are printed the job is automatically deleted from printer memory Reserve When you senda Reserve print job the printer does not print the job immediately It stores the job in memory so you can print the job later The job is held in memory until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu Repeat When you send a Repeat print job the printer prints all requested copies of the job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later You can print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory Other types of held jobs include e Profiles from various sources includ
174. he Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect Load either B5 or Executive size paper in the paper trays but not both N Paper and specialty media guidelines 7 Paper size Dimensions Optional Optional 2 000 sheet high Duplex unit 2 000 sheet dual Capacity feeder input trays Universal 182 x 431mm 7 1 x 16 9 in to 139 7 x 297 mm 5 5 x 11 7 in Note Turn size sensing off to support universal sizes that are close 98 4 x 431 8 mm to standard media 3 8 x 17 in to sizes 89 x 297 mm 3 5 x 11 7 in for the multipurpose feeder only 148 x 431 8 mm J 5 83 x 17 in to 140 x 297 2 mm 5 51x 11 7 in forthe duplex unit only 7 3 4 Envelope 98 4 x 190 5 mm Monarch 3 875 x 7 5 in 10 Envelope 104 8 x 241 3 mm 4 12 x 9 5 in DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 in C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 01 in 98 4 7 x 431 8 mm 3 8 x 17 in to 89 x 297 mm 3 5 x 11 7 in Other Envelope 1 The printer trays cannot distinguish between A5 and statement size paper when both sizes are loaded in the printer trays From the Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect Load either A5 or statement size paper in the paper trays but not both This paper size is supported only when the source is non size sensing or when size sensing is disabled 3 The printer trays cannot distinguish between B5 and Executive size paper whe
175. he file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Advanced Imaging Background Removal Adjusts the white portion of the output Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the white portion e Contrast Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast e Shadow Detail Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows e Sharpness Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness e Color Dropout Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition OCR processing Selecting a color eliminates the color from a form enabling improved OCR capabilities e Scan edge to edge Select this box to scan edge to edge e Mirror Image Select this box to create a mirror image scan e Negative Image Select this box to create a negative image scan e Jpeg Quality Select this box to choose JPEG quality Improving scan quality When should use Text Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan and preserving images mode copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for receipts carbon copy forms and documents that only contain text or fine line art When should I use Use Text Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a mixture of text Text Photo mode and graphics Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles
176. he following Off e Always On e Manual e Scheduled 8 If you selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps Otherwise click Submit a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released e Click Add Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings Faxing 121 3 Click Fax Settings 4 Click Analog Fax Setup 5 From the Fax Forwarding menu under Fax Receive settings select one of the following Print e Print and Forward e Forward 6 From the Forward to menu select one of the following e Fax E mail e FTP e LDSS eSF 7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded Note The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the Forward to menu 8 Click Submit Scanning to an FTP address 122 Scanning to an FTP address Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small
177. he high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities Note Paper labels are supported Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life For detailed information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com When printing on labels Use labels designed specifically for laser LED printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that The labels can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Label adhesives face sheet printable stock and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi 172 kPa pressure without delaminating oozing around the edges or releasing hazardous fumes Do not use labels with slick backing material e Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and cartridge warranties e Do not use labels with exposed adhesive Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 in of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Be sure adhesive backing does
178. he message and print from the tray selected for the print job e Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued e Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Troubleshooting 222 Change lt input src gt to lt type gt lt size gt load lt orientation gt You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type e Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job e Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued e Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Check lt input src gt guides The lt input src gt refers to the multipurpose feeder The printer cannot determine the size of the paper Try one or more of the following Readjust the paper guides Check the tray configuration Check lt input src gt orientation or guides The printer
179. he scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages When using the scanner glass e Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner e Scan or copy documents up to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in e Copy books up to 25 4 mm 1 in thick Learning about the printer 15 Understanding the printer control panel 1 Enter numbers letters or symbols on the display Dial Pause e Press to cause a two or three second dial pause in a fax number In the Fax To field a Dial Pause is represented by a comma e From the home screen press to redial a fax number e The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions When outside of the Fax menu fax function or home screen pressing causes an error beep In the Copy menu press to delete the right most digit of the value in the Copy Count The default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing numerous times In the Fax Destination List press to delete the right most digit of a number entered manually You can also press to delete an entire shortcut entry Once an entire line is deleted another press of causes the cursor to move up one line In the E mail Destination List press to delete the character to the left of the cursor If the character is in a shortcut then the shortcut is deleted Learning about the printer 16
180. heet drawer 274 flash memory card 275 hard disk with adapter 275 internal print server 275 Internal Solutions Port 275 memory card 275 option not working 273 paper tray problems 274 USB parallel interface card 276 troubleshooting scan cannot scan from a computer 269 partial document or photo scans 269 scan was not successful 268 scanner unit does not close 265 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 268 U Universal Paper Size setting 54 Universal Setup menu 140 unlinking trays 64 315 USB port 38 Utilities menu 191 V Verify print jobs 79 printing from Macintosh computer 80 printing from Windows 79 viewing reports 217 virtual display how to access 216 W Windows wireless network installation 42 wired network setup using Windows 47 wired networking using Macintosh 47 Wireless menu 150 wireless network configuration information 42 installation using Macintosh 44 installation using Windows 42 X XPS menu 197
181. hen print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings and then click General Settings 3 Click Timeouts 4 Inthe Power Saver field enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Power Saver mode 5 Click Submit Using the printer control panel Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch F9 Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the arrows until Timeouts appears Touch Timeouts yY OUOU A W N bP Touch the arrows next to Power Saver Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Power Saver mode co Touch Submit 9 Touch Reducing printer noise Use Quiet Mode to reduce the printer noise Note See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select a Quiet Mode setting Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 25 Reduce printer noise e Print jobs will process at one half the normal processing speed Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print There will be a short delay before the first page is printed Fans run at reduced speed or are turned off If your printer has faxing capability fax sounds are reduced or disabled including those made by the fax speaker and ringer The fax is placed in standby mode The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off e The printer wi
182. hen unplug the power cord from the wall outlet e Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it e Remove all printer options before moving the printer Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Removing the optional trays 1 Remove the printer tray 2 Remove the two thumbscrews and save them Maintaining the printer 3 Place the tray into the printer 4 Remove the cable cover 213 214 5 Disconnect the optional drawer connector Maintaining the printer A MANIN WS O PUTT ET PUTT HII EET lilli IIIN UT UT JH IHI III oe o IlIll HINT III HIII IlIll 6 Attach the cable cover 7 Liftthe printer off the trays Maintaining the printer 215 Moving the printer to another location The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions e Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options Keep the printer in an upright position e Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the origina
183. her end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter Note Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration 3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack Faxing 110 Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use Notes e Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region Depending on the ISDN port assignment you may have to connect to a specific port e When using a PBX system make sure the call waiting tone is off e When using a PBX system dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number e For more information on using the fax with a PBX system see the documentation that came with your PBX system Connecting to a distinctive ring service A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider This service allows you to have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cab
184. hod Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system Single pass from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Multiple pass Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Notes This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Single pass is the default setting Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass method only Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message Security Audit Log menu A Menu item Description Export Log Enables an authorized user to export the security log Notes e To export the log from the printer control panel a flash drive must be attached to the printer e From the Embedded Web Server the log can be downloaded to a computer Delete Log Specifies whether audit logs are deleted Yes Note Delete Now is the factory default setting No Configure Log Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created Enable Audit Enable Remote Syslog Remote Syslog Server Remote Syslog Port Remote Syslog Method Remote Syslog Facility Set Date and Time menu Menu item Description Current Date and Time Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer Manually Set Date amp Time Not
185. hooting 237 Jam numbers What to do 1 Remove all media from the multipurpose feeder 2 Flex and stack the media 3 Reload the multipurpose feeder Open each tray and then remove any jams 4 Adjust the paper guide O uooorh ndthenrenovetieim O OOOO es open Doorn anasten removere OOS aan iomar ihe duplex unit Door Dy and hen remove the jam Open Doors Aand E and tten remove anya aas opendoorsandthenrenovetieimn OOOO 290 294 jams Open the ADF cover and the scanner cover and then remove any jams On the touch screen select the location of your original document e Finish your job without further scanning e Restart scanning e Cancel the job and clear the message Troubleshooting 238 200 201 paper jams 1 Open Door A by pushing the release latch up and lowering the door AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Pull the jam up and toward you Yy Note If the jam does not move immediately stop pulling Push down and pull the green lever to make it easier to remove the jam Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close Door A Troubleshooting 239 202 paper jam 1 Open Door A by pushing the release latch up and lowering the door AN
186. ial jobs are printed when Print All is selected Notes e Alphabetically is the factory default setting e Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel Description Specifies whether duplex 2 sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs Notes e 1 sided is the factory default setting e To set 2 sided printing from the software program for Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup for Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Notes Long Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages Specifies a default number of copies for each print job Note 1 is the factory default setting Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 189 Menu item Description Collate Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Notes e Off is the fa
187. ibe to the telephone company s Distinctive Ring service then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Fax Settings 4 Click Analog Fax Setup 5 Inthe Rings to Answer box enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering 6 Click Submit Troubleshooting 272 THE TONER MAY BE LOW 88 Cartridge low appears when the toner is low Can receive but not send faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE On the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial e As an alternative dial the telephone number manually Received fax has poor print quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following RE SEND THE DOCUMENT
188. ifies the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction Short Edge Long Edge Notes e Short Edge is the factory default setting e Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray Bin Setup menu Description Output Bin Specifies the default output bin Standard Bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin lt x gt Understanding printer menus 142 Menu Item Description Configure Bins Mailbox Link Link Optional Specifies configuration options for output bins Notes Mailbox is the factory default setting Bins assigned the same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected Type Assignment The Mailbox setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox The Link setting links together all available output bins The Link Optional setting links together all available output bins except the standard bin and appears only when at least two optional bins are installed The Type Assignment setting assigns each paper type to an output bin or linked bin set Selects an output bin for each supported paper type Assign Type Bin Plain Paper Bin Card Stock Bin Transparency Bin Available selections for each type are Disabled Standard Bin Recycled Bin Bin lt x gt Labels Bin Bond Bin Envelope Bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Bin Letterhead Bin Preprinted Bin C
189. igh capacity feeder 58 loading multipurpose tray 75 loading trays 75 tips 75 letterhead printing on for Macintosh users 75 for Windows users 75 LexLink menu 151 light indicator 15 linking trays 64 Load lt input src gt with lt Custom String gt 224 Load lt input src gt with lt Custom Type Name gt 224 Load lt input src gt with lt size gt 225 Load lt input src gt with lt type gt lt size gt 224 Load lt src gt with lt x gt 224 Load Manual Feeder with lt Custom String gt 225 Load Manual Feeder with lt Custom Type Name gt 225 Load Manual Feeder with lt size gt 226 Load Manual Feeder with lt type gt lt size gt 226 Load manual feeder with lt x gt 225 Load Staples 226 loading 1 150 sheet tray 60 2 000 sheet dual input trays 60 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 58 500 sheet tray standard or optional 55 850 sheet tray 60 card stock 62 envelopes 62 letter or A4 size 64 letterhead in 2000 sheet high Capacity feeder 58 letterhead in multipurpose tray 75 letterhead in trays 75 multipurpose feeder 62 transparencies 62 M Macintosh wireless network installation 44 maintenance kit ordering 203 memory card installing 29 troubleshooting 275 Memory full cannot print faxes 226 menu settings page printing 39 menus Active NIC 144 AppleTalk 150 Bin Setup 141 Booklet Adjustments 197 Confidential Print 153 Configure MP 135 Copy Settings 160 Custom Bin Names 140 Custom Names 139 Custom Scan Siz
190. ing Lexmark Document Solutions Suite LDSS e Forms from a kiosk Bookmarks e Jobs not printed which are called parked jobs Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Other Options and then click Print and Hold 4 Select your job type Confidential Reserve Repeat or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential job also enter a four digit PIN Ul Click OK or Print and then go to the printer to release the job 6 On the home screen touch Held jobs Printing 80 7 8 9 10 11 Touch your user name Note A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs If your name does not appear touch the down arrow until your name appears or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer Touch Confidential Jobs Enter your PIN Touch the job you want to print Touch Print or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies and then touch Print Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held i
191. ino PT NOO ea TA T T tear oe eeaneeene 24 FR CIO ee T E E E E E i 25 Additional printer SetUp sesseseseesecescecescecescecesoececeececescecescecesceseseeseseeses 27 HS CaM NES internal OD LIONS as isriesarin eaae EEE AENEA AEE EEE 27 Installing hardware OptionS esesesessesesseeserrserrsrrrsressressessrrssrrsrevsrrrsseessreseresersrrssrereeretersereseeeeseessersseesere 36 Attachina CIDE S aA T ATE errs 38 Venn POr CUD ee E E E E 39 Setting UP the printer SOftWaA E sicccostseteceessecsavaiasmtensaoanyanethoasesensezancenanessbinnendandates RENEE AEE 40 SEE OPAN EE E PRANE eenaa E OEA EE E E 42 Installing the printer ON a wired NetWorK essssessssesssssussressessrssrrsressessersrrsressrrereseesseesereresressresrrsesrrserene 47 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions POft seseseceescecsrrssrrsren 50 Setting Up serial PrinUNE saccacsnrsesipeacetiasceaidsaienescet ia ai a ED A 52 Loading paper and specialty media sessessoessessecsssssescosssessoesssessesssessesss DG Setting the Paper Size and Paper TYPe cccccscccsssecesccesseccecceesecceeseeeueeceneceeeeeseueeeeeeeeeseceeasessueeseeeeetees 54 Configuring Universal paper Setting Suessemer a er r E EE ra AEE aeni 54 Loading the standard or optional 500 sheet trayS essssessesesesensrrsrsrrrrrrrrrerrerrrerrersrrsresrrsererererrrreerens 55 Loading A5 or Statement paper SIZOS csecseesccssscccveccnsccucescouscseusccuss
192. inue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued e Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Troubleshooting 221 Change lt input src gt to lt Custom String gt load lt orientation gt You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type e Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job e Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued e Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Change lt input src gt to lt size gt You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following e Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type e Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the tray se
193. iod The warranty period is ninety 90 days and commences on the date the Software Program is delivered to the original end user This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor Lexmark will replace the Software Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty 2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AS IS AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH WARRANTIES TO THE 90 DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions as that may be in force from time to time that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified If any such provisions apply then to the extent Lexmark is able Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those provisions to o
194. ion Font Name Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored lt list of available fonts gt Notes e Courier 10 is the factory default setting e The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for download Understanding printer menus 194 Menu item Description Symbol Set 10U PC 8 12U PC 850 PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR Specifies the symbol set for each font name Notes e 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting e 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting e A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For nonscalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page Notes e Portrait is
195. iple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG E mailing 104 e JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XML Paper Specification XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer 7 Touch E mail It Note If you selected Encrypted PDF then enter your password twice E mailing color documents 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch E mail Type an e mail address Touch Options Touch Color HO Wl BP WN Touch E mail It Canceling an e mail e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning app
196. ired to maintain optimum print quality Cleaning the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the outside of the printer making sure to include the standard exit bin Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure the standard exit bin is dry before beginning a new print job Note A cleaning kit consisting of wipes for the touch screen and scanner glass is available Part name Part number Cleaning kit wet and dry wipes 40X0392 Maintaining the printer 201 Cleaning the scanner glass Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover 3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry 4 Close the scanner cover Adjusting scanner registration Scanner Registration is a process to align the scan area with the
197. isk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Learning about the printer 9 Learning about the printer Thank you for choosing this printer We ve worked hard to make sure it will meet your needs To start using your new printer right away use the setup materials that came with the printer and then skim the User s Guide to learn how to perform basic tasks To get the most out of your printer read the User s Guide carefully and make sure you check the latest updates on our Web site We re committed to delivering performance and value with our printers and we want to make sure you re Satisfied If you do encounter any problems alon
198. ize substitutions are allowed e Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message appearing Menu item Description Plain Texture Smooth Normal Rough Card Stock Texture Smooth Normal Rough Transparency Texture Smooth Normal Rough Recycled Texture Smooth Normal Rough Labels Texture Smooth Normal Rough Bond Texture Smooth Normal Rough Envelope Texture Smooth Normal Rough Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray Notes e Normal is the factory default setting e Settings appear only if card stock is supported Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Note Rough is the factory default setting Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Rough Envelope Texture Smooth Normal Rough Letterhead Texture
199. izione ai raggi Fare Usynlig laserstr ling n r kassetter tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unng eksponering Niebezpiecze stwo niewidoczne promieniowanie laserowe po wyj ciu kasety i wy czeniu blokady Unika ekspozycji na wi zk OnacHo Mpn cHATbIx kapTpngxKax n HapylweHun nkcaynn Hesngumoe rnasy nasepHoe u3snyyeHnve Ns6era te Bosge cTtena nyya Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om Peligro Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser Varning Osynlig laserstralning n r kassetterna r borttagna och sp rren avaktiverad Undvik att uts tta dig f r str len E URA ee OW Ht A A TE A eB A Te RE a EEE T ERR TS RDS EB eS BA AY EEA SLY Ee URS gt GEOR ERE TE EAER T fe BR My VY ORASN EEIE A AGU HEDBALET IRICMSUEDICUT FEN Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Notices 293 Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs 730 W X860 800 W X862 830 W X864 Copying The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy original 800 W X8
200. jobs Lock Device This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and Device Lockout Personal Identification Number PIN has been set Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen Entering the correct PIN locks the printer control panel touch screen and hard buttons Unlock Device This button appears on the screen when the printer is locked The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while it appears Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen Entering the correct PIN unlocks the printer control panel touch screen and hard buttons Cancel Jobs Opens the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following items are available under the Print Fax and Network headings e Print job Copy job Fax profile FTP E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access information about the job If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs Using the touch screen buttons Note Depending on your options and administrative setup your screens and buttons may vary from those shown Learning about the printer 19 Sample touch screen Copy from Sides Duplex Letter 8 5 x 11in LW t gt Copy to Letter 8 5 x11 in Plain Paper A
201. k Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Faxing 118 Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory 1 On the home screen touch Cancel Jobs The Cancel Jobs screen appears 2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the screen touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are deleted and then the home screen appears Understanding fax options Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax e Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The fax screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photograph Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choi
202. k These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections Before you install the printer on a wired network make sure that e You have completed the initial setup of the printer The printer is connected to your network with the appropriate type of cable For Windows users 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD Wait for the Welcome screen to appear ao nN OF UI 9 Additional printer setup 48 If the CD does not launch after a minute then do the following a Click un or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive Click Install Printer and Software Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement Select Suggested and then click Next Note To configure the printer using a static IP address using IPv6 or to configure printers using scripts select Custom and follow the on screen instructions Select Wired Network Attach and then click Next Select the printer manufacturer from the list Select the printer model from the list and then click Next Select the printer from the list of printers discovered on the network and then click Finish Note If your configured printer does not appear in the list of discovered printers click Add Port and follow the on screen instructions Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation For Macintosh users 1 2 Allow the network DHCP server to
203. k used in your location Faxing 112 Setting the outgoing fax name and number To have the designated fax name and fax number printed on outgoing faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup Click General Fax Settings Click inside the Station Name box and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes Click inside the Station Number box and then enter the printer fax number aon OA UU A WU N Click Submit Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send If there is a power failure you may have to reset the date and time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Security 4 Click Set Date and Time 5 Click inside the Set Date amp Time box and then enter the current date and time 6 Click Submit Sending a fax Sending a fax using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transpare
204. knowledge your agreement to these License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are doing so with the intent to sign a contract with Lexmark CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you sign this License Agreement and if applicable you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to enter into this contract ENTIRE AGREEMENT This License Agreement including any addendum or amendment to this License Agreement that is included with the Software Program is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark relating to the Software Program Except as otherwise provided for herein these terms and conditions supersede all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with respect to the Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement except to the extent such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this License Agreement any other written agreement signed by you and Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software Program To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this License Agreement the terms of this License Agreement shall control MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES 1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be
205. l packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Administrative support 216 Administrative support Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Using the Embedded Web Server If the printer is installed on a network the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including e Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel Checking the status of the printer supplies e Configuring printer settings e Configuring network settings e Viewing reports To access the Embedded Web Server type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Notes e If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section e For more information see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Checking the virtual display When the Embedded Web Server is open a virtual display appears in the top left corner of the screen It works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel showing printer messages To access the Embedded Web Server type the p
206. lash Memory Defragment operation 230 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 229 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 230 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 230 38 Memory full 230 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 230 50 PPDS font error 230 51 Defective flash detected 231 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 231 53 Unformatted flash detected 231 54 Network lt x gt software error 231 54 Serial option lt x gt error 231 54 Standard network software error 231 55 Unsupported option in slot 232 56 Parallel port lt x gt disabled 232 56 Serial port lt x gt disabled 232 56 Standard parallel port disabled 232 56 Standard USB port disabled 232 56 USB port lt x gt disabled 233 57 Configuration change held jobs were not restored 233 58 Too many bins attached 233 58 Too many disks installed 233 58 Too many flash options installed 233 58 Too many trays attached 234 61 Remove defective disk 234 62 Disk full 234 63 Unformatted disk 234 80 Routine maintenance needed 234 84 Insert photoconductor 234 84 Photoconductor abnormal 235 84 Photoconductor low 235 84 Replace photoconductor 235 88 Cartridge low 204 235 88 Replace cartridge to continue 204 235 88 yy Replace cartridge 204 an error has occurred with the flash drive 220 Change lt input src gt to lt Custom String gt 220 Change lt input src gt to lt Custom String gt load lt orientation gt 221
207. le that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want the printer to answer Note The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On This allows the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns a Onthe home screen touch b Touch Settings c Touch Fax Settings d Touch Analog Fax Settings e Touch the down arrow until Distinctive Ring Settings appears Faxing 111 f Touch Distinctive Ring Settings g Touch the arrow for the pattern setting you want to change h Touch Submit Connecting to an adapter for your country or region The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack Country region Austria e New Zealand Cyprus e Netherlands Denmark e Norway Finland e Portugal France e Sweden Germany e Switzerland Ireland e United Kingdom Italy For some countries or regions a telephone line adapter is included in the box 1 2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port f Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter and then connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack Note Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown It will fit the wall jac
208. lected for the print job e Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Change lt input src gt to lt size gt load lt orientation gt You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following e Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type e Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job e Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued e Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Change lt input src gt to lt type gt lt size gt You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following e Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type e Touch Use current src to ignore t
209. lent type of lithium battery Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations Ay CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 55kg 121 Ibs and requires at least four persons or a properly rated mechanical handling system to move it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage e Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet e Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it e Lift the printer off the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer
210. lftone photographs graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images 5 Touch Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print each copy as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Collated Not collated 123 33 By default Collate is set to On If you do not want to collate your copies then change the setting to Off To turn collation off 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Use the keypad to enter the number of copies Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated O um A W N Touch Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on
211. lick Restart when installation is complete 2 Add the printer a For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences 2 Click Print amp Fax 3 Click 4 Click IP Additional printer setup 47 5 6 Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier 1 O UAWN 7 From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications Double click the Utilities folder Locate and double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List choose Add Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add b For AppleTalk printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 nou BW N From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click AppleTalk Select the printer from the list Click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 O ON DU BW N a From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications Double click the Utilities folder Locate and double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility From the Printer List choose Add Choose the Default Browser tab Click More Printers From the first pop up menu choose AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk zone Select the printer from the list Click Add Installing the printer on a wired network Use the following instructions to install the printer on a wired networ
212. lippings You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients There are three ways to send an e mail from the printer You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book Getting ready to e mail Setting up the e mail function For e mail to operate it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address To set up the e mail function 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Default Settings click E mail FTP Settings 4 Click E mail Settings 5 Click Setup E mail Server 6 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 7 Click Submit E mailing 101 Configuring the e mail settings 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser 2 3 4 5 6 Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click E mail FTP Settings Click E mail Settings Fill in the fields with the appropriate information Click Submit Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 U F amp F WwW N Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser
213. ll ignore the Advance Start command Use factory default settings This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer To select a Quiet Mode setting 1 On the home screen touch 2 Touch Settings 3 Touch General Settings 4 Touch Quiet Mode 5 Touch the arrows to select a setting 6 Touch Submit Submitting changes appears Recycling Lexmark strives to be an environmentally responsible provider of products and services From the way we design with the environment in mind to how we engineer our packaging to reduce materials all the way to the collection programs we provide and our environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycling Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 26 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in a Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
214. loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued e Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Change lt input src gt to lt Custom Type Name gt load lt orientation gt You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following e Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type e Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job e Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Change lt input src gt to lt Custom String gt You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type e Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job e Touch Continue to cont
215. mation about installing software for network printing see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Internal print server If the internal print server does not operate correctly these are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS e Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board e Make sure you are using the correct optional cable and that it is securely connected MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For information about installing software for network printing click Additional on the Software and Documentation CD and then select the Networking Guide link under Publications on this CD Troubleshooting 276 USB parallel interface card Check the USB parallel interface card connections e Make sure the USB parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board e Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected Solving paper feed problems Paper frequently jams These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER Use recommended paper and specialty media For more information see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines IMIAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder
216. me Lexmark X86x Series Machine type 7500 Model s 432 632 832 Edition notice March 2012 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer
217. me with your printer Selecting a location for the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 55kg 121 Ibs and requires at least four persons or a properly rated mechanical handling system to move it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any options leave enough room for them also It is important to e Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard e Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight humidity extremes or temperature fluctuations Learning about the printer Clean dry and free of dust e Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation eee 1 460 mm 18 1 in 640 mm 25 2 in 200 mm 7 9 in 1724 mm 67 9 in 3 460 mm 18 1 in Learning about the printer 12 Printer configurations Basic model R i a h Ta prmtercomror pana Ca senaren Ca i feeder 5 irri andra ep af Learning about the printer 13 Configured model 2 High capacity feeder Basic functions of the scanner The scanner provides copy fax and scan to net
218. menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog THE TONER IS LOW When 88 Cartridge Lowappears order a new toner cartridge THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the toner cartridge 282 Troubleshooting Repeating defects DS These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following Replace the transfer roller if the defects occur every 58 7 mm 2 31 in Replace the photoconductor if the defects occur every 44 mm 1 73 in Replace the fuser if the defects occur every e 78 5 mm 3 09 in 94 2 mm 3 71 in Skewed print CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications Solid black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper BC DEF A D i These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT If the fill pattern is incorrect choose a different fill pattern from your software program 283 Troubleshooting 284 CHECK THE PAPER TYPE e Try a different type of paper e Use only the recommended transparencies e Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder
219. menus 132 Paper menu Default Source menu Menu item Description Default Source Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Tray lt x gt MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Env Only an installed paper source will appear as a menu setting Notes Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source setting for the duration of the print job If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the job prints using the linked tray From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting Paper Size Type menu Description Tray lt x gt Size Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray A4 A5 JIS B5 e A4 isthe international factory default setting Letter is the US factory default setting Notes Letter Legal For trays with automatic size sensing only the size detected by the hardware appears Executive Oficio Folio Executive Oficio and Statement appear as options only if Tray Size Sensing it turned off Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray Statement Universal A3 is empty the job
220. mes menu Menu Item Description Standard Bin Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin Universal Setup menu These menu items are used to specify the height width and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size The Universal Paper Size is a user defined paper size setting It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet Menu item Description Units of Measure Identifies the units of measure Inches Notes Millimeters Inches is the US factory default setting e Millimeters is the international factory default setting Understanding printer menus 141 Menu item Description Portrait Width Sets the portrait width 3 17 inches 76 432 mm Notes e If the width exceeds the maximum the printer uses the maximum width allowed e 11 69 inches is the US factory default setting Inches can be increased in 0 01 inch increments e 297 mm is the international factory default setting Millimeters can be increased in 1 mm increments Portrait Height Sets the portrait height 3 17 inches 76 432 mm Notes e If the height exceeds the maximum the printer uses the maximum height allowed e 17 inches is the US factory default setting Inches can be increased in 0 01 inch increments e 432 mm is the international factory default setting Millimeters can be increased in 1 mm increments Feed Direction Spec
221. ming it to a pattern of small spots with a limited number of colors e Text emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Sides Duplex Specifies whether an original document is duplex two sided or simplex one sided 1 sided to 1 sided and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex 1 sided to 2 sided Notes 2 sided to 1 sided isi ided igi inti ide The copi edad to a ded 1 sided to 1 sided The original page has printing on one side The copied page will have printing on one side 1 sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on one side The copied page will have printing on both sides For example if the original is six sheets the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides 2 sided to 1 sided tThe original page has printing on both sides The copied page will have printing on only one side For example if the original draft is three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet 2 sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on both sides The copy mimics the original exactly Paper Saver Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page off Note Off is the factory default setting 2 on 1 Portrait 2 on 1 Landscape 4 on 1 Portrait 4 on 1 Landscape Collate Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies of
222. must match the serial parameters you set in the printer a Open the Device Manager Additional printer setup 53 0o a o wow In Windows Vista 1 Click B 2 Click Control Panel 3 Click System and Maintenance 4 Click System 5 Click Device Manager In Windows XP 1 Click Start 2 Click Control Panel 3 Click Performance and Maintenance 4 Click System 5 From the Hardware tab click Device Manager In Windows 2000 1 Click Start 2 Click Settings gt Control Panel 3 Click System 4 From the Hardware tab click Device Manager Click to expand the list of available ports Select the communications port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM 1 Click Properties On the Port Settings tab set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer Look for the printer settings under the serial heading on the Menu Settings page you printed earlier Click OK and then close all the windows Print a test page to verify printer installation When a test page prints successfully printer setup is complete Loading paper and specialty media 54 Loading paper and specialty media This section explains how to load the 500 and 2000 sheet trays and the multipurpose feeder It also includes information about paper orientation setting the Paper Size and Paper Type and linking and unlinking trays Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type The Paper Size setting is determined b
223. n e Make sure that the power cord is plugged firmly into the back of the 2 000 sheet drawer e Ifthe tray is empty then load paper in the tray e Clear any jams THE PAPER FEED ROLLERS DO NOT TURN TO ADVANCE PAPER e Make sure the printer is properly connected to the 2 000 sheet drawer Make sure the printer is turned on THE PAPER CONSISTENTLY JAMS IN THE DRAWER e Flex the paper e Make sure the drawer is properly installed e Make sure paper is loaded correctly e Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged e Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded Troubleshooting 275 Memory card Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Flash memory card Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Hard disk with adapter Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board Internal Solutions Port If the Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP does not operate correctly then these are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE ISP CONNECTIONS e Make sure the ISP is securely attached to the printer system board e Make sure the cable is securely connected to the correct connector CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For infor
224. n both sizes are loaded in the trays From the Size Sensing menu specify which size you want the printer to detect Load either B5 or Executive size paper in the paper trays but not both Supported paper types and weights The printer engine supports 38 128 g m 16 32 Ib paper weights Note Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at reduced speed Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper type Standard Multipurpose Optional 500 sheet trays tray 500 sheet Tray 1 and Tray trays Card stock Transparencies Paper Labels Bond Letterhead Envelopes Optional 2 000 sheet Optional 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 73 Duplex unit Printing 74 Printing This chapter covers printing printer reports and job cancelation Selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 235 and Storing paper on page 69 Printing a document 1 Load paper into a tray or drawer 2 From the Paper menu set the Paper Type and Paper Size to the type and size of paper you have loaded 3 Do one of the following For Windows users With a document open click File gt Print Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup From the Form Source list box select the source containing the paper you have loaded a b C d From the Form Type list box select the type of paper you have loaded e From the F
225. n the Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Sets the size of the USB input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The Disabled setting turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 K increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether the Resource Save setting is On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Understanding printer menus 147 Menu item Description Job Buffering Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The On setting
226. n the printer until you choose to delete them 1 10 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing Select your job type Confidential Reserve Repeat or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential job also enter a four digit PIN Click OK or Print and then go to the printer to release the job On the home screen touch Held jobs Touch your user name Note A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs If your name does not appear touch the down arrow until your name appears or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer Touch Confidential Jobs Enter your PIN Touch the job you want to print Touch Print or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies and then touch Print Printing from a flash drive A USB port is located on the printer control panel Insert a flash drive to print supported file types Supported file types include pdf gif jpeg jog omp png tiff tif pcx Atml xps and dcx Lexmark has tested and approved the following USB flash memory devices Lexar FireFly 512 MB Lexar FireFly 1 GB SanDisk Cruizer Micro 512 MB SanDisk Cruizer Micro 1 GB Sony 512 MB Sony 1 GB Printing 81 Notes e Hi Speed flash drives must support the USB 2 0 specification specifically
227. nabling you to scroll through the jobs Touch this button when more changes need to be made for a job or after clearing a paper jam e Cancels an action or a selection e Cancels out of a screen and returns to the previous screen Selects a menu or menu item Learning about the printer 22 Features Feature Description Menu trail line A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature acts as a Menus gt Settings gt Copy Settings gt trail showing the path taken to arrive at the current menu It gives the exact location Number of Copies within the menus Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the user default setting Attendance message alert If an attendance message occurs which closes a function such as copy or fax then a solid red dot appears over the function button on the home screen This indicates that an attendance message exists Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 23 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packagin
228. ncies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Fax Faxing 113 4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad To add recipients touch Next Number and then enter the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book Note To place a dial pause within a fax number press I The dial pause appears as a comma in the Fax to box Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the computer Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk This gives you the flexibility of faxing documents directly from software programs Note In order to perform this function from your computer you must use the PostScript printer driver for your printer 1 From your software program click File gt Print 2 From the Print window select your printer and then click Properties 3 Choose the Other Options tab and then click Fax 4 Click OK and then click OK again 5 On the Fax screen type the name and number of the fax recipient 6 Click Send Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time yo
229. nd messages and Network Port menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected 1 on OA A A W N Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch F9 Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Factory Defaults appears Touch the left or right arrow until Restore Now appears Touch Submit Touch Troubleshooting 219 Troubleshooting Solving basic problems Solving basic printer problems If there are basic printer problems or the printer is unresponsive make sure e The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker e The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords e Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working e The printer is turned on Check the printer power switch e The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device e All options are properly installed e The printer driver settings are correct Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on This often fixes the problem Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds The printe
230. nd size then it prints from the default source e Cancel the current job Load Manual Feeder with lt Custom String gt Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default source Cancel the current job Troubleshooting 226 Load Manual Feeder with lt size gt Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default source Cancel the current job Load Manual Feeder with lt type gt lt size gt Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default source e Cancel the current job Load Staples G5 G11 G12 Try one or more
231. ne of the following providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement of the price paid for the Software Program The Software Program may include internet links to other software applications and or internet web pages hosted and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible in any way for the hosting performance operation maintenance or content of such software applications and or internet web pages 3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OF LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U S DOLLARS OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY YOUR SOLE REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU INNO EVENT WILL LEXMARK ITS SUPPLIERS SUBSIDIARIES OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT EXEMPLARY PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES LOST SAVINGS INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF INACCURACY IN OR DAMAGE TO DATA Notices 305 OR RECORDS FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY ARISING OUT OR IN ANY WA
232. nections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Confidential and other held jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PARTIAL JOB NO JOB OR BLANK PAGES PRINT The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data e Delete the print job and then print it again e For PDF documents recreate the PDF and then print it again MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them Job takes longer than expected to print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Eliminate the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job CHANGE THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING TO OFF a Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch F9 Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears Touch Print Recovery Touch the right arrow next to Page Protect until Off appears Touch Submit Touch O O N DOD U A WU N Troubleshooting 264 Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control pan
233. ned LexLink nickname Note The LexLink nickname can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Use the following menu to configure the SMTP server Understanding printer menus 152 Menu item Description Primary SMTP Gateway Primary SMTP Gateway Port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port SMTP Timeout 5 30 Reply Address Use SSL Disabled Negotiate Required SMTP Server Authentication No authentication required Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials User Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID and Password Use Session E mail address and Password Prompt User Device Userid Device password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain Specifies SMTP server port information Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send the e mail Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Specifies server information This is a required item Notes e The message box has a limitation of 512 characters e Disabled is the factory default setting for Use SSL Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail privileges Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Specifies server information Notes e The message boxes have a limitation of 512 characters e None is the factory de
234. network setup 47 finding more information about the printer 9 finisher finishing features 84 supported paper sizes 84 Finishing menu 188 firmware card installing 31 flash drive 80 Flash Drive menu 181 flash memory card installing 31 troubleshooting 275 font sample list printing 82 forwarding faxes 120 FTP address book 123 FTP quality improving 126 FTP screen advanced options 125 options 124 125 FTP Settings menu 178 G General Settings menu 156 green settings Power Saver 23 H hard disk installing 33 hard disk with adapter troubleshooting 275 held jobs 79 printing from Macintosh computer 80 310 printing from Windows 79 Help menu 198 holding faxes 120 home screen buttons 16 HTML menu 196 Image menu 197 Insert Tray lt x gt 224 installation wireless network 42 44 installing options in driver 41 printer software 40 installing options order of installation 36 installing printer software adding options 41 internal print server installing 32 troubleshooting 275 Internal Solutions Port troubleshooting 275 Internal Solutions Port network changing port settings 50 IPv6 menu 149 J jams avoiding 235 locating jam areas 236 locations 236 numbers 236 jams clearing 200 201 238 202 239 203 240 230 240 231 240 24x 246 250 250 280 281 250 282 250 283 253 284 256 285 286 256 287 288 256 290 294 259 293 261 Index L labels paper tips 78 letterhead copying to 89 loading 2000 sheet h
235. ngs Network Card menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt Network Card Description View Card Status Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card Connected Disconnected Understanding printer menus 148 Menu item Description View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card Network Address Lets you view the network addresses UAA LAA Job Timeout Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can take before it 0 225 seconds is canceled Notes e 90 seconds is the factory default setting e A setting value of O disables the timeout e If a value of 1 9 is selected then the setting is saved as 10 Banner Page Allows the printer to print a banner page Note Off is the factory default setting On TCP IP menu Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP IP information Note This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt TCP IP Description Activate Activates TCP IP On Note On is the factory default setting Off View Hostname Lets you view the current TCP IP hostname Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Se
236. not reach to the sheet edge Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm 0 04 in away from edges is recommended Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty e f zone coating of the adhesive is not possible remove a 1 6 mm 0 06 in strip on the leading and driver edge and use a non oozing adhesive e Portrait orientation works best especially when printing bar codes Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly impact print quality Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities e From the Paper menu set the Paper Type to Card Stock e Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting e Be aware that preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems e Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without releasing hazardous emissions e Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer e Use grain short card stock when possible Printing 79 Printing confidential and other held jobs Holding jobs in the printer When sending a job to the printer you can specify t
237. nt the job using a different paper tray e Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray Check the Print Properties or Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size and type e Check that the paper size is correctly set For example if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Cancel the current print job 34 Incorrect media check lt input src gt guides Try one or more of the following e Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the tray e Press the up or down arrow button until V continue appears and then press V to clear the message and print the job using a different tray 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing e To enable Resource Save after receiving this message make sure the link buffers are set to Auto and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes When Ready appears enable Resource Save e Install additional memory 37 Insufficient memory to collate job Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job Cancel the current print job Troubleshooting 230 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation T
238. nt to add to the To box To enter additional recipients press Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add or search the address book 7 Touch E mail It E mailing 103 Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch E mail Type an e mail address Touch Options Touch Subject Type the e mail subject Touch Done O on Do UW A W N Touch Message a O Type an e mail message a a Touch Done a N Touch E mail It Changing the output file type 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch E mail 4 Type an e mail address 5 Touch Options 6 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send e PDF Creates a single file with mult
239. nter Understanding printer menus 168 Menu item Description Dial Mode Specifies the dialing sound either as a tone or a pulse Tone Pulse Max Speed Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Custom Job scanning Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Background Removal Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Lets you automatically center the fax on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Color Dropout Specifies which color to drop during faxing and how much to increase or decrease Color Dropout the dropout None Notes Red e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Green Blue e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specifies the contrast of the output Best for content Note Best for content is the factory default setting 0 5 Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Shadow Detail 0 4 Scan edge to edge Sharpness 0 5 Enable Color Fa
240. nter successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page e On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings Notes e Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings e Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected Understanding printer menus 160 Copy Settings menu Menu item Description Content Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job Text Photo Photograph Notes e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original Printed Image i i documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Text Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images Printed Image converts the images to halftone Halftoning makes a grayscale or color image printable by transfor
241. nterf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence re ue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t con u pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis a l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install a l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller a ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re a n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Taiwan NCC RF notice statement NCC Hu Sintra ase ft SR Ae oe a A USL Hs ONS HR JERE AT eB SS ESER MA DRR RUST CE DAE HERA SH ee SZ BE Ma Ra CE Be Fe Sa fs ERE TLRS gt RESCBI SAL
242. nto the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then touch Mixed Sizes Touch Copy to and then touch Letter O uu BF W N Touch Copy It The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan and then scales the legal size pages to print on letter size paper Copying 91 Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Sides Duplex area touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed The first number represents sides of the original documents the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 1 sided to 2 sided if you have 1 sided original documents and you want 2 sided copies 5 Touch Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be reduced to 25 of the original document size or enlarged to 400 of the original document size The factory default setting for Scale is Auto If you leave Scale set to Auto the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the siz
243. nto the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document 5 Touch Copy to and then select the size you want the copy to be Note If you select a paper size that is different from the Copy from size then the printer will scale the size automatically 6 Touch Copy It Making copies using paper from a selected tray During the copy process you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice For example if specialty media is located in the multipurpose feeder and you want to make copies on that media 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Copying 90 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document 5 Touch Copy to and then touch Manual Feeder or the tray that contains the paper type you want Note If you choose Manual Feeder then you will need to also select the paper size and type 6 Touch Copy It Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes Use the ADF to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes load
244. ntrol panel Paper Menu select the Default Source e For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties e For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE Replace the toner cartridge THE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR Check the paper path around the toner cartridge AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clear any paper you see THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Toner fog or background shading appears on the page These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the toner cartridge 285 Troubleshooting 286 THE CHARGE ROLLS MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the charge rolls THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Toner rubs off These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING From the printer con
245. nts of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures CCC EMC notice m A IEA AR m EEA A m ER MCA EXP T mH RIE PRAISE HY 4T AHNE BSMI notice SEENE EUAN EERE gt TENERI ETR EMENT RS RIT RTT SEH Det Let 40 0C 60 0C Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile Notices 295 Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQH H HTXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be conne
246. o electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Notices 298 Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Notice to users in Brazil Este equipamento opera em carater secundario isto e nao tem direito a protecao contra interferencia prejudi
247. o not need to attach the printer to a computer but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes Equipment and service options Fax connection setup Connect directly to the telephone line See Connecting to an analog telephone line on page 109 Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line DSL or ADSL service See Connecting to a DSL service on page 109 Connect to a Private Branch eXchange PBX or Integrated See Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system on page 110 Services Digital Network ISDN system Use a Distinctive Ring service See Connecting to a distinctive ring service on page 110 Connect through an adapter used in your area See Connecting to an adapter for your country or region on page 111 Faxing 109 Connecting to an analog telephone line If your telecommunications equipment uses a US style RJ11 telephone line then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack Connecting to a DSL service If you subscribe to a DSL service then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord and then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the ot
248. oc mode configures the printer for wireless networking directly between it and a computer Compatibility Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11n 802 11b g 802 11b g n Choose Network Lets you select an available network for the printer to use aa E of available networks gt View View Signal Quality Quality Lets you view the Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection of the wireless connection View Security Mode Lets you view the encryption method for the wireless connection Disabled indicates that the wireless network is not encrypted AppleTalk menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt AppleTalk Menu item Description Activate Activates AppleTalk support Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk name Note The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk address Note The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network lt list of zones available on the Note The default setting is the default zone for the network If no default network gt zone exists the zone marked with an is the default setting Understanding printer menus 151 NetWare menu This menu is available fr
249. of a print job Description Specifies the printed output resolution Note 600 dpi is the factory default setting The printer driver default is 1200 IQ Enhances the printed quality of small fonts and graphics Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Fonts applies this setting only to text e Horizontally darkens horizontal lines of text and images e Vertically darkens vertical lines of text and images e Both Directions darkens horizontal and vertical lines on text and images Lightens or darkens the printed output Notes e 8 is the factory default setting e Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner Understanding printer menus Menu item Enhance Fine Lines Gray Correction Auto Off Brightness 6 to 6 Contrast 0 5 Utilities menu Menu item Remove Held Jobs Confidential Held Not Restored All Format Flash Yes No 191 Description Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes e Off is the factory default setting e To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in a browser window Adjusts the gray value of printed output Note Auto is the factory default setting Adjusts or darkens printed output and conserves toner Notes e 0 isthe factory default setting e A negative value will darken text images and graphics A
250. of the following e Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Memory full cannot print faxes There is not enough memory to print the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted Remove paper from lt linked bin set name gt Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from all bins Remove the paper from all of the bins The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from bin lt x gt Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing Troubleshooting 227 If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin Replace all originals if restarting job One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared Replace the original documents in the scanner to restart the scan job Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears This can
251. old print job is stapled along the center fold Adjusting toner darkness 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Print Settings 4 Click Quality Menu 5 Adjust the toner darkness setting 6 Click Submit Copying 87 Copying Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel press 4 Ifyou placed the document on the scanner glass then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass
252. olored Bin Light Bin Heavy Bin Rough Cotton Bin Custom lt x gt Bin Reports menu Note When you select a menu item from the Reports menu the indicated report prints Menu item Description Menu Settings Page Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays installed memory the total page count alarms timeouts the control panel language the TCP IP address the status of supplies the status of the network connection and other information Device Statistics Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Understanding printer menus 143 Network Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers Network lt x gt Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes e This menu item is available when more than one network option is installed e This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers Wireless Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the wireless network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes e This menu item is available when a wireless card is installed and Lexmark Document Solutions Suite is enabl
253. om the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt NetWare Menu item Activate Yes No View Login Name Print Mode Network Number Select SAP Frames Ethernet 802 2 Ethernet 802 3 Ethernet Type II Ethernet SNAP Packet Burst Yes No NSQ GSQ Mode Yes No LexLink menu Description Activates NetWare support Note No is the factory default setting Lets you view the assigned NetWare login name Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Lets you view the assigned NetWare print mode Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Lets you view the assigned NetWare network number Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Enables the Ethernet frame type setting Note On is the factory default setting for all menu items Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server Note Yes is the factory default setting Specifies the NSQ GSQ Mode setting Note Yes is the factory default setting This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt LexLink menu View Nickname SMTP Setup menu Description Activates LexLink support Note Off is the factory default setting Lets you view the assig
254. on Scales page content to fit the selected paper size Note No is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 193 Menu item Description Annotations Prints annotations in a PDF Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print PostScript menu Menu item Description Print PS Error Prints a page containing the PostScript error Note Off is the factory default setting Font Priority Establishes the font search order Resident Flash Disk Notes e Resident is the factory default setting e A formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available e The flash memory option or printer hard disk cannot be Read Write Write or password protected e Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 PCL Emul menu Menu item Description Font Source Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item Resident Disk Download Flash All Notes Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded into printer RAM Flash and Disk settings appear only if applicable and show all fonts resident in that option Flash and Disk options must be properly formatted and cannot be Read Write Write or password protected Download appears only if applicable and shows all the fonts downloaded into printer RAM All shows all fonts available to any opt
255. on the system board 6 Insert a screw into the hole on the right side of the connector slot Gently tighten the screw to secure the card to the system board tray q S e 4 x 7 Reinstall the system board Installing a printer hard disk CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electrical components and hard disks are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components connectors or the hard disk Note A 2 Phillips screwdriver is needed to attach the hard disk to the mounting plate 1 Access the system board 2 Remove the mounting plate hard disk ribbon cable and attachment screws from the package Additional printer setup 3 Attach the ribbon cable to the hard disk 34 Additional printer setup 35 6 Flip the hard disk over and then press the three posts on the mounting plate into the holes on the system board The hard disk snaps into place 7 Reinstall the system board Reinstalling the system board
256. ontent Text Photo Photograph Text 181 Description Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Description Specifies the format of the file Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB Notes e Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art e Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Text is used when the document is mostly text Specifies whether job prints in grayscale or color Note Gray is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 182 Menu item Description Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 75 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 200 300 400 600 Darkness Lightens or darkens the ou
257. oor A by pushing the release latch up and lowering the door AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Troubleshooting 251 2 Pull the jam up and toward you Note If the jam does not move immediately stop pulling Push down and pull the green lever to make it easier to remove the jam Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close Door A 4 Open Door F 5 Remove the jam 6 Close Door F Troubleshooting 252 282 paper jam 1 Open Door F 2 Remove the jam 3 Close Door F Troubleshooting 253 283 289 staple jams 283 paper jam 1 Lift Door H 2 Remove the jam 3 Close Door H 289 staple error 1 Open Door G Troubleshooting 254 2 Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder and move the holder to the right 4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard and then pull out the sheet of staples Discard the entire sheet 5 Look through the clear covering on the bottom of the cartridge holder to make sure no staples are jammed at the entrance Troubleshooting 255 6 Press down on the staple guard until it
258. ord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many flash options installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess flash memory Troubleshooting 234 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many trays attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 61 Remove defective disk Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk 62 Disk full Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing e Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk e Install a larger printer hard disk 63 Unformatted disk Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Format the printer hard disk If the error message remains the hard disk may be defective and require replacing 80 Routine maintenance needed The printer needs to have routine maintenance done Order a maintenance kit which contains all the items necessary to replace the pick rollers the charge roll the transfer roller and the fu
259. ore it is included in the FTP file When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Edge Erase Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Darkness Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out Scanning to an FTP address 126 Improving FTP quality Question When should use Text Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of sending a document to an FTP site mode and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for receipts carbon copy forms and documents that only contain text or fine line art When should use Use Text Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that contains a mixture of Text Photo mode text and graphics Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures When should I use Photo Use Photo mode when the original document is composed mostly of photos printed on a laser mode printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper Scanning to a computer or flash drive 127 Scanning to a computer or flash drive Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items
260. orm Size list box select the size of paper you have loaded f Click OK and then click Print For Macintosh users In Mac OS X a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 From the Paper Size pop up menu choose a paper size that matches the size of the loaded paper or create a custom size 3 Click OK b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog 1 With a document open click File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Printer Features From the Feature Sets pop up menu choose Paper mW N From the Paper type pop up menu choose a paper type 5 Click Print In Mac OS 9 a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 From the Paper pop up menu choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper 3 Click OK Printing 75 b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print 2 Select a Paper Source option and then choose the tray loaded with the appropriate paper 3 Click Print Printing on specialty media Tips on using letterhead Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers Placing paper in the trays Page ori
261. ory cards Printer memory Flash memory Fonts e Firmware cards Bar Code and Forms IPDS and SCS TNe PrintCryption PRESCRIBE Printer hard disk Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP RS 232 C Serial ISP Parallel 1284 B ISP MarkNet N8150802 11 b g n Wireless ISP MarkNet N8130 10 100 Fiber ISP MarkNet N8120 10 100 1000 Ethernet ISP e MarkNet N8110 V 34 Fax Card Additional printer setup 28 Accessing the system board to install internal options Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer 1 Loosen the screw s on the access panel located on the back of the printer Additional printer setup 29 3 Use the illustration below to locate the appropriate connector Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors
262. ory default setting Letter is the US factory default setting e The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense paper size The paper size value must be set e JIS BS is supported only if feeding orientation is long edge Note Only installed trays drawers and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 134 Menu item Description MP Feeder Type Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Notes e From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item Recycled Labels e Plain Paper is the factory default setting Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type lt x gt Manual Paper Size Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded A4 Note A4 is the international factory default setting Letter is the US factory A3 default setting Tabloid JIS B4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Folio Statement Universal Note Only installed trays drawers and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 135 Menu item Description Manual Paper Type Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded Plain Paper Note Plain Paper is the factory default setting Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Ligh
263. ou enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment Resolution Adjusts the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e mail file size Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image e PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG e JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photo Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices Content affects the quality and size of your e mail Text Emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a cle
264. ouch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 7 Touch the arrows to select the desired width or height Loading paper and specialty media 55 8 Touch Submit to save your selection Submitting Selection appears followed by the Paper menu 9 Touch to return to the home screen Loading the standard or optional 500 sheet trays The printer has two standard 500 sheet trays Tray 1 and Tray 2 and it may have one or more optional 500 sheet trays All 500 sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types Paper may be loaded in the trays in either the long edge or short edge orientation 1 Pull the tray completely out Loading paper and specialty media 56 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface ad ZZ a ra Pe Te LER OSL 4 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup Load the paper in either the long edge or short edge orientation as shown Notes e Load sizes larger than A4 in the short edge orientation e Paper must be loaded in the short edge orientation to create booklets if the optional booklet finisher is installed Long edge orientation Short edge orientation 5 Make sure the paper guides are secure against the edges of the paper Loading paper and specialty media 57 6 Insert the tray 7 Ifthe paper type you loa
265. ove the option and install it again e Print a network setup page to verify that your printer is correctly connected to the network This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly Note If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings Once you select and save other settings from the menus they replace the factory default settings as user default settings A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again choose another value and save it To restore the factory default settings see Restoring the factory default settings on page 218 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch F9 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch Menu Settings Page The menu settings page prints and the printer returns to the home screen Additional printer setup 40 Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch Network Setup Page The network setup page prints and the
266. ow light or dark your scanned e mails will turn out Faxing 107 Faxing Note Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Getting printer ready to fax Initial fax setup Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information ina margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission station name identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and station number telephone number of the sending fax machine business other entity or individual To enter your fax setup information use the printer control panel or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu Note If you do not have a TCP IP environment then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information Using the printer control panel for fax setup When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time a series of start up screens appear If the printer has fax capabilities then the following screens appear Station Name Station Number 1 When Station Name appears enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes
267. paper from all bins 226 Remove paper from bin lt x gt 226 Remove paper from standard output bin 227 Replace all originals if restarting job 227 228 Restore Held Jobs 227 Scan Document Too Long 228 Scanner ADF Cover Open 228 scanner jam 228 Scanner Jam Access Cover Open 228 Serial lt x gt 228 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 223 Some held jobs were not restored 228 printer options troubleshooting 2 000 sheet drawer 274 flash memory card 275 hard disk with adapter 275 internal print server 275 Internal Solutions Port 275 memory card 275 option not working 273 paper tray problems 274 USB parallel interface card 276 printer problems solving basic 219 printing directory list 82 font sample list 82 for Macintosh users 74 for Windows users 74 from flash drive 80 installing printer software 40 menu settings page 39 network setup page 40 print quality test pages 82 printing confidential and other held jobs from Macintosh computer 80 from Windows 79 printing on A5 paper 57 B5 paper 58 Executive paper 58 Statement paper 57 Index publications where to find 9 Q Quality menu 190 Quiet Mode 24 R recycled paper using 23 recycling Lexmark products 25 toner cartridges 26 WEEE statement 291 reducing acopy 91 registration scanner 201 Remove paper from lt linked bin set name gt 226 Remove paper from all bins 226 Remove paper from bin lt x gt 226
268. paper location To manually adjust the scanner registration 1 Turn the printer off 2 Clean the scanner glass and backing material 3 Hold down 3 and 9 until the progress bar appears 4 Release the buttons The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Diagnostic menu appears 5 Touch the up or down arrow until Scanner Test appears 6 Touch Scanner Test Maintaining the printer 202 7 Touch the up or down arrow until Scanner Manual Registration appears 8 Touch Scanner Manual Registration 9 Touch the left and right arrows to change the settings 10 Touch Submit Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to e Direct sunlight e Temperatures above 35 C 95 F e High humidity above 80 Salty air Corrosive gases e Heavy dust Conserving supplies There are some settings you can change from the printer control panel that will help you conserve toner and paper If you need to print several copies you can conserve supplies by printing the first copy and checking it for accuracy before printing the remaining copies Checking the status of supplies A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appe
269. pense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Modular component notice This product contains the following modular component s FCC ID E46HFD1 Industry Canada IC 4423B HFD1 Notices 291 Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product 1 meter average sound pressure dBA Printing 53 dBA Ready 32 dBA Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Temperature information Ambient temperature 15 32 C 60 90 F Shipping temperature 40 60 C 40 140 F Storage temperature 1 60 C 34 140 F Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive g The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the E
270. per Letterhead Custom Type lt x gt Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays assign a different Paper Type name to the tray such as Custom Type lt x gt or define your own custom name e Paper Size for example letter A4 statement Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray automatically Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu Warning Potential Damage Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in the tray The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type Paper may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected Assigning a custom paper type name Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 From the home screen touch 9 3 Touch Paper Menu 4 Touch Paper Size Type 5 Select the tray number or MP Feeder Type 6 Touch the left or right arrow until Custom Type lt x gt or another custom name appears 7 Touch Submit Changing a Custom Type lt x gt name You can use the Embedded Web Server or MarkVision to define a name other than Custom Type lt x gt for each of the custom paper types that are loaded When a Custom Type lt x gt name is changed the menus display the
271. printer returns to the home screen 5 Check the first section on the network setup page and confirm that Status is Connected If Status is Not Connected the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Setting up the printer software Installing printer software A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer The printer software is typically installed during the initial printer setup If you need to install the software after setup follow these instructions For Windows users 1 Close all open software programs 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD 3 From the main installation dialog click Install 4 Follow the instructions on the screen For Macintosh users 1 Close all open software applications 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD 3 From the Finder desktop double click the printer CD icon that automatically appears 4 Double click the Install icon 5 Follow the instructions on the screen Using the World Wide Web 1 Go to the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com 2 From the Drivers amp Downloads menu click Driver Finder 3 Select your printer and then select your operating system 4 Download the driver and install the printer software Additional printer setup 41 Updating available options in the printer driver Once the printer soft
272. produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Statement of Limited Warranty Lexmark X86x Series Notices 302 Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited
273. r folder opens Locate the printer that has changed Note If there is more than one copy of the printer then update all of them with the new IP address Right click the printer Click Properties Click the Ports tab Locate the port in the list and then select it Click Configure Port Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field You can find the new IP address on the network setup page you printed in step 1 Click OK and then click Close Additional printer setup 51 For Macintosh users 1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address 2 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP IP section of the network setup page You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 3 Add the printer e For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a D0 Qn wT From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier a vn Dd QA nN amp From the Go menu choose Applications Double click Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add e For AppleTalk printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 a OD Qa O oo From the Apple menu
274. r glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Fax Use the keypad to enter the fax number Touch Options From the Resolution area touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want HO UW BH W NN Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Fax Use the keypad to enter the fax number Touch Options From the Darkness area touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax HO UW BH WN Touch Fax It Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch F
275. r is installed The Hole Punch Alarm is only displayed when a finisher with hole punch is installed Timeouts Sets the amount of time the printer is in standby mode Standby Mode Timeouts Sets the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed Power Saver before it goes into a reduced power state 1 240 min Notes e 30 minutes is the factory default setting e Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times e Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the room e Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before Screen Timeout returning the printer display to a Ready state 15 300 sec Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an Print Timeout end of job message before canceling the remainder of the print job Disabled Notes 1 255 sec e 90 seconds is the factory default setting e When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting e Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Und
276. r menus 165 General Fax Settings Menu item Description Fax Cover Page Configures the fax cover page Fax Cover Page Note Off is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options Off by default On by default Never Use Always Use Include To field On Include From field From Include Message field Message Include Logo Include Footer lt x gt Footer lt x gt Station Name Specifies the name of the fax within the printer Station Number Specifies a number associated with the fax Station ID Specifies how the fax is identified Station Name Station Number Enable Manual Fax Sets the printer to fax manually only which requires a line splitter and a telephone hand set Notes e Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number e Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function Memory Use Defines the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs All receive Notes Mostly receive Equal All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs Mostly sent Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs All send Equal is the factory default setting Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs All send specifies that all the memory is set to sen
277. r papers such as premium 24 Ib laser papers 50 90 Sheffield units and much rougher papers such as premium cotton papers 200 300 Sheffield units have been engineered to work very well in laser printers despite surface texture Before using these types of paper consult your paper supplier e Suitable sheet to sheet coefficient of friction 0 4 0 6 e Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed Recycled paper paper of lower weight lt 60 g m 16 Ib bond and or lower caliper lt 3 8 mils 0 1 mm and paper that is cut grain short for portrait or short edge fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding Before using these types of paper for laser electrophotographic printing consult your paper supplier Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer for example if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions Saving energy Adjusting Power Saver To save energy you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Power Saver mode Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 24 Available settings range from 1 240 minutes Factory default setting Printer machine type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer t
278. r self test failed Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on If the clock graphic and Ready do not appear then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support Embedded Web Server does not open These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network CHECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS Depending on the network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server For more information see your system administrator Troubleshooting 220 Understanding printer messages An error has occured with the Flash Drive Please remove and re insert the drive Try one or more of the following e Remove and reinsert the flash drive e If the error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacing Change lt input src gt to lt Custom Type Name gt You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type e Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are
279. rays configuring from the bottom up Note The optional 500 sheet trays and optional 2 000 sheet dual input trays are interchangeable eee T o e ee E gt a 4 oo z O 1 Tray 3 and Tray 4 500 sheet trays or 2 000 sheet dual input trays a2 Tray 1 and Tray 2 500 sheet trays Tray 5 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder Additional printer setup fa Duplex unit Note Optional trays lock together when stacked Remove stacked trays one at a time from the top down 3 Align the printer with the tray and then lower the printer into place 4 Turn the printer back on 5 Set the printer software to recognize the optional input source For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 41 Attaching cables Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable Be sure to match the following e The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer e The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port 38 Additional printer setup 39 USB port Ethernet port Verifying printer setup e Print a menu settings page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Rem
280. res or photos Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document Advanced Options Touching this button opens ascreen where you can change Delayed Send Advanced Imaging Custom Job Transmission Log Scan Preview Edge Erase and Advanced Duplex settings Delayed Send Lets you send a fax at a later time or date After setting up your fax touch Delayed Send enter the time and date you would like to send your fax and then touch Done This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours or when transmission times are cheaper Note If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on e Advanced Imaging Adjusts Background Removal Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Shadow Details Scan Edge to Edge and Sharpness before you fax the document e Custom Job Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Transmission Log Prints the transmission log or transmission error log Scan Preview Displays the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears e Edge Erase Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular e
281. rinter IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section The virtual display appears in the top left corner of the screen Administrative support 217 Checking the device status Using the Embedded Web Server you can view paper tray settings the level of toner in the print cartridge the percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit and capacity measurements of certain printer parts To view the device status 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status Setting up e mail alerts You can have the printer send you an e mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed added or unjammed To set up e mail alerts 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items for notification and type in the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note See your system support person to set up the e mail server Viewing reports You can vi
282. rinting from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking Doing so may cause a jam 1 Lower the multipurpose feeder 2 Pull the tray extension out Note Do not place objects on the multipurpose feeder Also avoid pressing down on it or applying excessive force to it 3 Slide the width guides to the outside of the feeder Loading paper and specialty media 63 4 Flex the sheets or envelopes back and forth to loosen them then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper or specialty media into the feeder Note Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line Overloading may cause jams 7 Set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder MP Feeder Size and MP Feeder Type to the correct value for the print media you loaded For more information see Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type on page 54 Loading paper and specialty media 64 Loading letter or A4 size paper in the short edge orientation By default the printer is set to recognize letter or A4 size paper loaded in the long edge orientation If you want to load letter or A4 size paper in the short edge orientation make sure you enable Short edge Printing 1 Make sure the printer is off 2 From the printer control
283. rmal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib e Multiple part forms or documents Selecting paper Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid jams and poor print quality e Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended print side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same source mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead e Use grain long for 64 216 g m 17 58 Ib paper e Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process e Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use papers printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt
284. roubleshooting Gray background CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting e From the printer control panel change the setting from the Quality menu e For Windows users change the setting from Print Properties e For Macintosh users change the setting from the Print dialog Incorrect margins These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog 279 Troubleshooting Paper curl These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY e Load paper from a fresh package
285. rrent WINS Server Address IPv6 menu Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 IPv6 information Note This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network lt x gt gt Std Network Setup or Net lt x gt Setup gt IPv6 View Hostname View Address View Router Address Enable DHCPv6 Description Enables IPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router Note On is the factory default setting Lets you view the current setting Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Enables DHCPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 150 Wireless menu Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings Note This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Network lt x gt gt Net lt x gt Setup gt Wireless Description Network Mode Specifies the network mode Infrastructure Ad hoc Notes e Infrastructure mode lets the printer access a network using an access point e Ad hoc is the factory default setting Ad h
286. rse compilation You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software Program Notices 306 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE This License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement TERM This License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected You may reject or terminate this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications documentation and merged portions in any form or as otherwise described herein Lexmark may terminate your license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon such termination you agree to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications documentation and merged portions in any form TAXES You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including without limitation any goods and services and personal property taxes resulting from this Agreement or your Use of the Software Program LIMITATION ON ACTIONS No action regardless of form arising out of this Agreement may be brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen except as provided under applicable law APPLICABLE LAW This Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealt
287. rver IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP IP Address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP IP Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP IP Gateway Enable DHCP Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the RARP address assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Enable BOOTP Enable AutolP Yes No Enable FTP TFTP Yes No Enable HTTP Server Yes 149 Description Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting Note Yes is the factory default setting Enables the built in FTP server which allows you to send files to the printer using the File Transfer Protocol Note Yes is the factory default setting Enables the built in Web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser Note Yes is the factory default setting DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS Server Address Enable DDNS MDNS Lets you view or change the current DDNS MDNS Server Address WINS Server Address Lets you view or change the cu
288. ry ArA i to 1 side sided to 2 sided Scale lt ts gt on Collate Darkness i ofi Md a od ot Button Function Home Returns to the home screen Scroll down Opens a drop down list Left scroll decrease Scrolls to another value in decreasing order Right scroll increase Scrolls to another value in increasing order n _ Learning about the printer 20 Button Function Submit Saves a value as the new user default setting Navigates back to the previous screen Other touch screen buttons Button Function Down arrow Moves down to the next screen q Up arrow Moves up to the next screen 4 Unselected radio button This is an unselected radio button The radio button is gray to show it is unselected O Selected radio button This is a selected radio button The radio button is blue to show it is selected a Learning about the printer 21 Button Function Cancel Jobs Continue Opens the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following items are available under the Print Fax and Network headings e Print job e Copy job e Fax profile e FTP e E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access information about the job If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears e
289. ry devices see Printing from a flash drive on page 80 Jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MMIAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT Make sure Ready or Power Saver appears on the display before sending a job to print CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED e Verify that you are using the correct printer software e Ifyou are using a USB port make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible printer software MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING e Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network e Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected If the status is Not Connected check the network cables and then try printing the network setup page again Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly Copies of the printer software are also available on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Troubleshooting 263 IMIAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB SERIAL OR ETHERNET CABLE For more information visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED Check the cable con
290. ry one or more of the following Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing e Delete fonts macros and other data in printer memory e Install additional printer memory 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Touch Continue to clear the message 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk Press the up or down arrow button until V continue appears and then press V to clear the message 38 Memory full Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message e Cancel the current print job e Install additional printer memory 39 Complex page some data may not have printed Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job Install additional printer memory 50 PPDS font error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e The printer cannot find a requested font From the PPDS menu select Best Fit and then select On The printer will find a similar font and reformat the affected text Cancel the current print job Troubleshooting 231 51 Defective flash detected Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the me
291. s CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure if applicable e Telephone e Handset e Answering machine CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK 1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack 2 Listen for a dial tone 3 If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone into the wall jack 4 lf you still do not hear a dial tone then plug a telephone into a different wall jack 5 If you hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used e If you are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider e If you are using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider e If you are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE e Place atest call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly e If the telephone line is being used by another device
292. s If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch E mail Enter the e mail address or shortcut number To enter additional recipients touch Next Address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Touch E mail It nding an e mail using a shortcut number Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Press A and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad To enter additional recipients press Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Touch E mail It Sending an e mail using the address book 1 O uu A W N Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch E mail Touch Search Address Book Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for and then touch Search Touch the name that you wa
293. s To prevent print quality problems avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies Before loading transparencies fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together We recommend Lexmark transparencies For ordering information see the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Tips on using envelopes Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without sealing wrinkling curling excessively or releasing hazardous emissions For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib bond paper or 25 cotton All cotton envelopes must not exceed 70 g m 20 Ib bond weight Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Printing 78 Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes e Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Note A combination of high humidity over 60 and t
294. s Paper tray recommendations e Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray e Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing Troubleshooting 236 e Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it prior to printing or wait for a prompt to load it e Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height e Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes e Push the tray in firmly after loading paper Paper recommendations e Use only recommended paper or specialty media e Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper e Flex fan and straighten paper before loading it a N Soon Penne oS 7 aS J ses as Gq A F J g TA e Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same stack e Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus e Store paper per the manufacturer s recommendations Understanding jam numbers and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location appears on the display Open doors and covers and remove trays to access jam locations To resolve any paper jam message you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path Troubles
295. se menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state Opens the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus Note This function must be set up by your system support person Once it is set up it appears as a display item Status message bar Shows the current printer status such as Ready or Busy e Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low e Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what you should do so the printer can continue processing such as Close door or Insert print cartridge Status Supplies Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring intervention Touch this button to access the messages screen for more information on the message including how to clear it Opens a context sensitive Help feature within the display touch screens TEET Other buttons that may appear on the home screen Learning about the printer 18 Displayitem item Function Release Held Faxes If this button is shown then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set To access the list of held faxes touch this button Search Held Jobs Searches on any of the following items and returns search results e User names for held or confidential print jobs e Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs e Profile names Bookmark container or job names e USB container or job names for supported extensions only Held Jobs Opens a screen containing all the held
296. ser 84 Insert photoconductor Install the specified photoconductor to clear the message Troubleshooting 235 84 Photoconductor low 1 Press the up or down arrow button until contine appears and then press V 2 Ordera replacement photoconductor immediately When print quality is reduced install the new photoconductor 84 Replace photoconductor The printer will not print any more pages until the photoconductor is replaced Replace the specified photoconductor 84 Photoconductor abnormal An unacceptable photoconductor has been installed in the device Replace the photoconductor 88 Cartridge low The toner is low Replace the print cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 Replace cartridge to continue Replace the toner cartridge 298 01 Scanner Missing Cable Unplugged The scanner was not detected Make sure the scanner is properly connected 1565 Emulation error load emulation option The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card To fix this download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Clearing jams Jam error messages appear on the control panel display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred When there is more than one jam the number of jammed pages is displayed Avoiding jams The following hints can help you avoid jam
297. sert the Software and Documentation CD It launches automatically If the CD does not launch after a minute then launch the CD manually 1 Click B or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Run or Start Search box type D setup exe where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive Click Install Printer and Software Click Agree to accept the Printer Software License Agreement Click Custom Make sure Select Components is selected and then click Next Make sure Local is selected and then click Next Select the manufacturer of the printer from the menu Select the printer model from the menu and then click Add Printer Click the beside the printer model under Select Components Make sure the correct port is available under Select Components This is the port where the serial cable attaches to the computer If the correct port is not available select the port under the Select Port menu and then click Add Port Make any configuration changes necessary in the Add a New Port window Click Add Port to finish adding the port Make sure the box next to the selected printer model is checked Select any other optional software you want to install and then click Next Click Finish to complete the printer software installation 3 Set the COM port parameters After the printer driver is installed you must set the serial parameters in the communications COM port assigned to the printer driver The serial parameters in the COM port
298. ssage and continue printing Cancel the current print job 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in flash memory e Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card 53 Unformatted flash detected Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing e Format the flash memory If the error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacing 54 Network lt x gt software error lt x gt is the number of the network connection Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer e Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer or print server 54 Serial option lt x gt error lt x gt is the number of the serial option Try one or more of the following Check that the serial cable is connected correctly and is the proper one for the serial port e Check that the serial interface parameters protocol baud parity and data bits are set correctly on the printer and host computer e Touch Continue to continue printing e Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer 54 Standard network software
299. such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Scan Profile 3 Click Create Scan Profile Note Your computer must have java program installed to be able to create a scan profile 4 Select your scan settings and then click Next 5 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file 6 Enter ascan name The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display 7 Click Submit 8 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents 9 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin m
300. supporting the High Speed mode e USB devices must support the FAT File Allocation Tables system Devices formatted with NTFS New Technology File System or any other file system are not supported e If selecting an encrypted pdf file then enter the file password from the printer control panel e Before printing an encrypted pdf file enter the file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes e If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive e If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs then Printer Busy appears After the other jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive 3 Touch the document you want to print Note Folders found on the flash drive appear as folders File names are appended by the extension type for example jpg 4 Touch the arrows if you want to increase the number of printed copies 5 Touch Print Printing 82 Printing information pages Printing a font sample list To print samples of the fonts currently available for your printer 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch Menus 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch the up or
301. t is a paper type or size Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default source Cancel the current job Load lt input src gt with lt Custom Type Name gt Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default source Cancel the current job Load lt input src gt with lt Custom String gt Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default source Cancel the current job Load lt input src gt with lt type gt lt size gt Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray t
302. t printing 82 Disk corrupted 223 Disk Full Scan Job Canceled 223 Disk Wiping menu 154 display troubleshooting display is blank 219 display shows only diamonds 219 display printer control panel 15 adjusting brightness 217 distinctive ring service connecting to 110 documents printing for Macintosh users 74 for Windows users 74 duplex unit installing 37 duplexing 91 309 E Embedded Web Server 216 administrator settings 216 checking device status 217 does not open 219 networking settings 216 setting up e mail alerts 217 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide 216 emission notices 290 291 293 294 298 299 300 Empty hole punch box 223 enlarging a copy 91 envelopes loading 62 tips 77 environmental settings Power Saver 23 Quiet Mode 24 Ethernet networking Macintosh 47 Windows 47 Ethernet port 38 exterior of the printer cleaning 200 e mail canceling 104 notice of low supply level 217 notice of paper jam 217 notice of paper needed 217 notice that different paper is needed 217 e mail function setting up 100 e mail screen advanced options 106 options 104 105 E mail Settings menu 173 e mailing adding message line 103 adding subject line 103 changing output file type 103 color documents 104 configuring the e mail settings 101 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 101 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 101 setting up e mail function 100 Index using shortcut numbers
303. t Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type lt x gt Manual Envelope Size Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded 7 3 4 Envelope Note DL Envelope is the international factory default setting 10 Envelope is 10 Envelope the US factory default setting DL Envelope Other Envelope Manual Envelope Type Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded Envelope Note Envelope is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Custom Type lt x gt Note Only installed trays drawers and feeders are listed in this menu Configure MP menu Description Configure MP Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Cassette Notes Manual First Cassette is the factory default setting The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an automatic paper source When Manual is selected the multipurpose feeder can be used only for manual feed print jobs If paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder and First is selected then paper always feeds from the multipurpose feeder first Understanding printer menus Substitute Size menu Menu item Substitute Size All Listed Off Statement A5 Letter A4 11 x 17 A3 Paper Texture menu 136 Description Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Notes e All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are allowed e The Off setting indicates no s
304. t load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch FTP Touch Search Address Book Type the name or part of the name you are searching for and then touch Search Touch the name that you want to add to the To field N HO ul BP WN Touch Send It Creating shortcuts Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers using a computer or using the printer touch screen Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a n
305. telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services Notices 297 This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications e There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and e The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The Lexmark filter must be us
306. tem To Format Reply Address Subject Message Primary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Image Format PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif Content Text Text Photo Photograph Fax Resolution Standard Fine Super Fine Ultra Fine Darkness 1 9 Description Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen Specifies SMTP server port information Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Specifies SMTP server port information Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Specifies the image type for scan to fax Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax Notes e Text is used when the document is mostly text Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art e Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Orientation Portrait Landscape Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6 in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Use Multi Page TIFF Enable Analog Receive E mail Settings menu Menu item E mail Server Setup Subject Message 173 Description Sp
307. test pages print 7 Touch Back 8 Touch Exit Configuration Blank pages These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE TONER CARTRIDGE Remove the toner cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed Reinstall the toner cartridge Troubleshooting 278 THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge Low appears order a new toner cartridge If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact Customer Support Clipped images Try one or more of the following CHECK THE GUIDES Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Ghost images CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog T
308. the factory default setting e Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page e Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page Specifies the number of lines that print on each page Notes e 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting e The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page Sets the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes e 198 mm is the factory default setting e The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return after a line feed control command Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed after a carriage return control command Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 195 Menu item Description Tray Renumber Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use Assign MP Feeder different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Off Notes None 0 199 Assign Tray lt x gt e None is not an available selection It appears only when it is selected by e Off is the factory default setting the PCL 5 interpreter Off oe None 0 199
309. then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts This product uses a printing process that produces ozone You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the precautions to take to limit ozone concentration Safety information 8 CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a professional service person A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the r
310. then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax e If you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone Troubleshooting 271 TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT To ensure the printer is working correctly connect it directly to the telephone line Disconnect any answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters CHECK FOR JAMS Clear any jams and then make sure that Ready appears TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting Voice MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL 1 Dial the fax number 2 Scan the original document one page at a time Can send but not receive faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer or subscr
311. ting e The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol e The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Std Network Setup Sets printer settings on jobs sent through a network port Network Card Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless TCP IP network IPv6 AppleTalk NetWare LexLink Net lt x gt Setup Reports or Network Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk NetWare LexLink Understanding printer menus Standard USB menu 146 Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch PS SmartSwitch NPA Mode Auto Off USB Buffer Auto Disabled 3K to lt maximum size allowed gt Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch setting is On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e Whe
312. ting the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job Troubleshooting MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY Add printer memory or an optional hard disk Unexpected page breaks occur INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch F9 Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears Touch Timeouts Touch Submit Touch O O N OU A W N FF Solving copy problems Copier does not respond These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears Scanner unit does not close Make sure there are no obstructions 1 Liftthe scanner unit 2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open 3 Lower the scanner unit Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears 265 Troubleshooting 266 Poor copy quality These are some examples of poor copy quality e Blank pages e Checkerboard pattern e Distorted graphics or pictures e Missing characters e Faded print Dark print e Skewed lines e Smudges Streaks e Unexpected characters e White lines in print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR
313. tion Name Dialed Number Enable Job Log Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin lt x gt Speaker Settings Menu item Speaker Mode Always Off On until Connected Always On Speaker Volume High Ringer Volume 171 Description Enables automatic printing of fax logs Note Logs print after every 200 jobs Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned Enables access to the Fax Job log Enables access to the Fax Call log Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed Description Notes e Always Off turns the speaker off e On until Connected is the factory default setting The speaker is on and issues a noise until the fax connection is made e Always On turns the speaker on Controls the volume setting Note High is the factory default setting Controls the fax speaker ringer volume Note On is the factory default setting Description Answers Calls with a one ring pattern Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Double Ring 172 Description Answers calls with a double ring pattern Note On is the factory default setting Answers Calls with a triple ring pattern Note On is the factory default setting Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission Fax Server Setup Menu i
314. tory default setting Understanding printer menus 170 Menu item Description Max Speed Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Fax Forwarding Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Forward Print Print and Forward Forward to Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded Fax Note This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server E mail FTP LDSS eSF Forward to Shortcut Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type Fax E mail FPT LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified Holding Faxes Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule Held Fax Mode Note Off is the factory default setting Off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Specifies the default staple setting for the attached finisher Note Only the settings associated with the installed finisher appear Fax Log Settings Menu item Description Transmission Log Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job Print log Do not print log Print only for error Receive Error Log Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error Print Never Print on Error Understanding printer menus Menu item Auto Print Logs Log Paper Source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Logs Display Remote Sta
315. tput 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Off Long edge Notes Short edge e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Understanding printer menus 183 Menu item Description Photo JPEG Quality 5 90 JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF Scan bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Background Removal 4 to 4 Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes e 50 is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but
316. trol panel Paper menu make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the tray Toner specks These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following Troubleshooting 287 THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the toner cartridge THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Transparency print quality is poor Try one or more of the following CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Contacting Customer Support When you call Customer Support describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries regions visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Notices 288 Notices Product information Product na
317. twork cards gt e This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed Standard Network or Network lt x gt menus Note Only active ports appear in this menu all inactive ports are omitted Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Auto communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exitin
318. u can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed e Touch a paper size button to select it as the Copy to setting The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed e If the size settings for Copy from and Copy to are different then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference e If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays then touch Manual Feeder and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder e When Copy to is set to Auto Size Match each copy matches the size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays then the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper Scale This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25 and 400 Scale can also be set for you automatically e When you want to copy from one size of paper to another such as from legal size to letter size paper setting the Copy from and Copy to paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1 touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1 e Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change e Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate Darkness This option adj
319. u want to send a fax you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup 5 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number To create a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group Note Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon Faxing 114 6 Assign a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Click Add Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Fax A Enter the fax number To create a group of fax numbers touch Next
320. uropean Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number Product disposal Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options Notices 292 ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Laser notice The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655 675 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeat
321. usts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo Photograph or Printed Image e Text Emphasize sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Copying 97 e Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document e Printed Image Used when copying halftone photographs graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images Sides Duplex Use this option to select duplex settings You can print copies on one or two sides make two sided copies duplex of two sided original documents make two sided copies from one sided original documents or make one sided copies simplex from two sided original documents Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document The factory default setting for Collate is on the output pages of your copies will be ordered 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 If you want all the copies of each page to remain together turn Collate off and your copies will be ordered 1 1
322. ware and any options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For Windows users 1 Do one of the following In Windows Vista Click on a b Click Control Panel c Click Hardware and Sound d Click Printers In Windows XP a Click Start b Click Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 a Click Start b Click Settings gt Printers Select the printer Right click the printer and then select Properties Click the Install Options tab Under Available Options add any installed hardware options O um A W N Click Apply For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences 2 Click Print amp Fax 3 Select the printer and then click Options amp Supplies 4 Click Driver and then add any installed hardware options 5 Click OK In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier 1 From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications 2 Double click Utilities and then double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility 3 Select the printer and then from the Printers menu choose Show Info Additional printer setup 42 4 From the pop up menu choose Installable Options 5 Add any installed hardware options and then click Apply Changes Setting up wireless printing Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network Note Do not connect the installation or network cabl
323. work capability for large workgroups You can e Make quick copies or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs e Send a fax using the printer control panel e Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time e Scan documents and send them to your computer an e mail address a flash drive or an FTP destination e Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF by way of FTP Learning about the printer 14 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass Automatic Document Feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents Using the ADF The Automatic Document Feeder ADF can scan multiple pages including duplex pages When using the ADF e Load the document into the ADF faceup short edge first e Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray e Scan sizes from 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 in to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in e Scan documents with mixed page sizes letter and legal e Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g m 14 to 32 Ib e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Using the scanner glass T
324. x Scans On by default Never use Always use Off by default 169 Description Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax Note 0 is the factory default setting Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to faxing Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a fax Note 3 is the factory default setting Enables color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white Rings to Answer 1 25 Paper Source Auto Tray lt x gt Multi Purpose Feeder Output Bin Standard Bin Bin 1 lt x gt Sides Duplex Note On is the factory default setting Description Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job Note 1 is the factory default setting Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax Specifies an output bin for received faxes Note Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed Enables duplex printing two sided printing for incoming fax jobs Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax Note On is the fac
325. y by the terms and conditions of such license 6 TRANSFER You may transfer the Software Program to another end user Any transfer must include all software components media printed materials and this License Agreement and you may not retain copies of the Software Program or components thereof The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these License Agreement terms Upon transfer of the Software Program your license is automatically terminated You may not rent sublicense or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this License Agreement and any attempt to do so Shall be void 7 UPGRADES To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade you must first be licensed to the original Software Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade After upgrading you may no longer use the original Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility 8 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING You may not alter decrypt reverse engineer reverse assemble reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software Program except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter operability error correction and security testing If you have such statutory rights you will notify Lexmark in writing of any intended reverse engineering reverse assembly or reve
326. y the position of the paper guides in the tray for all trays except the multipurpose feeder The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch F9 Touch Paper Menu 2 3 4 Touch Paper Size Type 5 Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears 6 Touch Submit 7 Touch to return to the home screen Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal Paper Size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu Then specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper e Units of measure millimeters or inches e Portrait Width e Portrait Height Note The smallest supported Universal size is 98 4 x 89 mm 3 9 x 3 5 in the largest size is 297 x 431 mm 11 7 x 7 in Specify a unit of measurement Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch F9 Touch Paper Menu Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired unit of measure 1 2 3 4 Touch the down arrow until Universal Setup appears and then touch Universal Setup 5 6 T

Lexmark 16M1742 Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents